keymap property
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d9c9b920 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-10-12
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 29support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
30maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
31build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
32necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 33
d9c9b920
DL
34** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
35new display features described below.
36
e90813b8 37** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 38all of the new display features described below. The port currently
e90813b8 39lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support.
d9c9b920 40
1fa28578
GM
41\f
42* Changes in Emacs 21.1
43
c607d53d 44** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 45trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
46this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
47
4104194e
GM
48** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
49be added to the end of the buffer because of `require-final-newline'.
50
c6f01e00
MB
51** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
52To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
53`auto-compression-mode' command.
54
4c724b32
DL
55** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
56`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME.
57
b856f39c 58+++
068127d6
GM
59** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
60operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
61
fd06c7da
MB
62** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs header-line
63(which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), so that it
64remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. This behavior
65may be disabled by customizing the option `Info-use-header-line'.
66
8ac08dea 67+++
62c273d7
DL
68** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
69is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
70
71+++
72** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
73mode `iswitchb-mode'.
74
8ac08dea 75+++
f393cf90
DL
76** Gnus changes.
77
78The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
79four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
80internationalization and mail-fetching.
81
82*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
83many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
84
85If you used procmail like in
86
87(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
88(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
89(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
90(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
91
327652be 92this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
93
94(setq mail-sources
95 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
96 :suffix ".in")))
97
98More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
99Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
100
101*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
102Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
4301cf66
DL
103Separate MIME packages like RMIME, SEMI, mime-compose etc., will
104probably no longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
f393cf90 105
60dd7e0e 106*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
107parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
108are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
109now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
110
111*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
112called to position point.
113
114*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
115summary buffers and NOV files.
116
117*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
118of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
119
120*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
121subtly different manner.
122
123*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
124and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
125ever-changing layouts.
126
127*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
128
72190b84 129*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90
DL
130
131** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
1328859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
133more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
134empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
135window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
136on.
137
ba9eeda1
GM
138** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
139set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
140file that is already visited under a different name.
141
42ac0ae5
GM
142** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
143nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
144
145** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
146recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
147signaled.
148
ba9eeda1 149** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
150support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
151use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
152buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
153M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
154new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
155
b941a14b 156+++
ba9eeda1 157** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 158and displays information about that.
b941a14b 159
ba9eeda1 160** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
83b6997f
GM
161file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
162
d7b38c05 163** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 164added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
165Postscript files are included.
166
167** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
168`dired-ref.tex'.
169
25ad1371
GM
170** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
171expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
172
173This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
174determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
175mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
176interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
177regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
178associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
179
b856f39c 180+++
f0298744
DL
181** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
182displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
183menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
184menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
185
9a8d84ca
DL
186** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
187a version-dependent component.
188
d76c03ea
GM
189** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
190Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
191will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
192character is still bound as before.
193
3b4fa1b2
DL
194** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
195using that menu.
196
40e857ea 197** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 198suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 199
beb2eb00 200+++
c08398de
DL
201** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
202buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
203contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
204by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
205insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
206the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
207Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
208
db7a3ede 209+++
3d6cd763
GM
210** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
211coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
212escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
213such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
214recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 215always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 216read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
217(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
218RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 219
0b8a3a6d
DL
220** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
221environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
222
424d8b44 223+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
224** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
225point in a pop-up window.
226
6d35b49f 227+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
228** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
229displays all characters in that character set.
230
231** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
232coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
233
a4067978 234+++
5cb6a58e 235** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 236on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
237defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
238commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 239
424d8b44 240+++
a1b8d58b
GM
241** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
242
6e417ca5
DL
243** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
244been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
245
424d8b44 246+++
5898e075
DL
247** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
248`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
249indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
250indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
251
424d8b44 252+++
abfcc168
GM
253** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
254sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 255(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
256You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
257
424d8b44 258+++
cc181e95
GM
259** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
260on the display using several methods
261
424d8b44 262+++
cc181e95
GM
263- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
264a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
265be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
266
424d8b44 267+++
cc181e95 268- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 269equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 270
da4496b6 271- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
272
273- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
274the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
275
424d8b44 276+++
3b4fa1b2 277** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 278an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 279command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 280does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 281
424d8b44 282+++
176256a1 283** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
284`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
285typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 286
dd0add8e
DL
287** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
288characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
289
bf3ba9ac 290+++
699238d9
GM
291** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
292compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
293this behavior.
294
295The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
296compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
297Emacs dump core.
298
424d8b44 299+++
699238d9 300** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 301
7233c5bd
GM
302*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
303whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
304is useful for debugging X problems.
305
306Example:
307
699238d9 308 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 309
100b3cbb
GM
310*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
311visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
312the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
313and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
314visual class names are
315
316 TrueColor
317 PseudoColor
318 DirectColor
319 StaticColor
320 GrayScale
321 StaticGray
322
323Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
324`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
325meaning.
326
327The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
328supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
329`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
330visual.
331
332Example:
333
699238d9 334 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
335
336*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
337specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
338default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
339resource values are `true' or `on'.
340
341Example:
342
699238d9 343 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 344
0d0c76b8
EZ
345** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
346more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
347now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
348
42088c12 349** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 350display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
351shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
352be customized.
c60ea02e 353
424d8b44 354+++
31047e0d
DL
355** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
356
424d8b44 357+++
b02786f9
GM
358** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
359all frames except the selected one.
360
3261c1d8
DL
361** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
362to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
363
ffe36136 364** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
365the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
366MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
367displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
368
0292b49f 369+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
370** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
371MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 372
559cee90
DL
373** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
374read mail from the menu etc.
375
480b5773 376+++
271b4185
GM
377** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
378a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
379
0daee095
GM
380** Changes in Texinfo mode.
381
a5e350c9 382*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
383macros
384
385 Key binding Macro
386 -------------------------
387 C-c C-c C-s @strong
388 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 389 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 390 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 391 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
392 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
393 M-RET @item
394
395*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 396
559cee90
DL
397** Changes in Outline mode.
398
399There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
400`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
401the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
402
327652be 403** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 404
c0a8c108
EZ
405+++
406*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
407with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
408are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
409Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
410buffers to kill, as before.
411
412Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 413i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
414this way.
415
956777b3
GM
416** Changes to Show Paren mode.
417
418*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
419The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
420use. Default is 1000.
421
f6989277 422+++
404fa7d6
DL
423** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
424groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
425
424d8b44
DL
426+++
427** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
428M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
429M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
430buffers.
8964fec7 431
424d8b44 432+++
39783d73
WP
433** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
434under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
435.emacs file.
436
437The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
438determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
439
d35fce81
GM
440** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
441abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
442`directory-abbrev-alist'.
443
a933dad1
DL
444** Faces and frame parameters.
445
446There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
447Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
448`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
449`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
450sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
451for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
452parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
453
454Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
455`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 456`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
457`default' face and vice versa.
458
d80061fa 459+++
f77a4a8a
GM
460** New face `menu'.
461
462The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
463Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
464attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
465
424d8b44 466+++
a933dad1
DL
467** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
468
469The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
470colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
471correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
472the screen gamma of a frame's display.
473
474PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
475in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
476color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
477
478The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
479`ScreenGamma'.
480
481** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
482
483The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
484Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
485oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
486of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
487the text.
488
489** Emacs has a new face implementation.
490
491The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
492font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
493height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
494These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
495specify a font.
496
497Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
498These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
499under Lisp changes, below.
500
501** New default font is Courier 12pt.
502
424d8b44
DL
503+++
504** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
505of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
506otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
507
508** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
509truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
510foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
511customizing face `fringe'.
512
8d0f00fd
MB
513** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
514You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
515
516The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
517versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
518and its use is deprecated.
a933dad1
DL
519
520** LessTif support.
521
424d8b44
DL
522Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
523You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
524
525** Toolkit scroll bars.
526
527Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
528LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
529configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
530bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
531bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
532Emacs.
533
534When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
535Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
536Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
537Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
538define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
539`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
540
541Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
542a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
543directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
544different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
545system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
546add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
547
548The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
549`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
550This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
551image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
552Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
553
554** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
555
556When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
557widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
558Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
559
424d8b44 560+++
a933dad1
DL
561** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
562
563When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
564whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
565defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
566highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
567displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
568whitespace.
569
6e612d4d 570+++
a933dad1
DL
571** Busy-cursor.
572
573Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
574display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
575
424d8b44 576+++
a933dad1
DL
577** Blinking cursor
578
579M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
580terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
581and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
582the group `cursor'.
583
8ac08dea 584+++
a933dad1
DL
585** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
586
587This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
588generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
589See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
590details.
591
592Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
593have to do anything to activate it.
594
595** Tabs and variable-width text.
596
597Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
598defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
599independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
600Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
601
602** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
603
424d8b44 604+++
a933dad1
DL
605*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
606
607 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
608
79dd1637
RS
609The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
610LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 611
79dd1637
RS
612*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
613LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 614
34d90e29 615+++
a933dad1
DL
616** Hscrolling in C code.
617
cc181e95
GM
618Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
619`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
620customized.
a933dad1 621
8ac08dea 622+++
a933dad1
DL
623** Tool bar support.
624
625Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
d9c9b920
DL
626of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
627changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
8628686a
DL
628displayed and is on by default. To make the tool bar more useful, we
629need contributions of extra icons for specific modes (with copyright
630assignments).
a933dad1 631
424d8b44 632+++
a933dad1
DL
633** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
634
635Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
636mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
637line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
638about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
639in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
640
641Currently, the following actions have been defined:
642
643- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
644buffers.
645
646- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
647M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
648
649- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
650
424d8b44
DL
651- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
652`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
653
654- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
655
656** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
657
658When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 659from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
660non-nil.
661
662** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
663
664Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
665Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
666the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
667italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
668Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
669attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
670on terminals.
a933dad1 671
54a9404d
EZ
672The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
673supported on character terminals.
674
a933dad1
DL
675** Sound support
676
2f516940 677Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 678driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 679supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 680
424d8b44 681+++
a933dad1
DL
682** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
683the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
684forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
685value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
686users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
687even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
688
689The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
690
0e18b431 691+++
a933dad1
DL
692** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
693
694As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
695drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
696`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
697
fdd8bb68 698+++
a933dad1
DL
699** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
700bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
701
702This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
703`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
704variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
705
c5d00c64 706+++
a933dad1
DL
707** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
708
709When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 710value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 711number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 712fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
713
714When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
715value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
716number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 717fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
718
719** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
720notably at the end of lines.
721
722All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
723spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
724
424d8b44 725+++
eee54b0e
DL
726There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
727
a933dad1
DL
728** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
729query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
730after each match to get the replacement text.
731
00782214 732+++
d5483ab1
GM
733** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
734you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 735
424d8b44 736** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
737you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
738lisp-complete-symbol.
739
7af69644 740+++
a933dad1
DL
741** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
742
163ea954 743If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
a299a6f0
GM
744longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
745is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
746minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
a933dad1
DL
747
748- User option: max-mini-window-height
749
750Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
751fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
a299a6f0 752specifies a number of lines.
a933dad1
DL
753
754Default is 0.25.
755
a299a6f0
GM
756- User option: resize-mini-windows
757
758How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
5820dead 759resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
a299a6f0
GM
760grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
761again.
762
763Default is `grow-only'.
764
2f72fd2f
GM
765** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
766
0d43b60d
GM
767** Changes to hideshow.el
768
769Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
327652be
TTN
770selection and traversal, includes more isearch support, and has more
771conventional keybindings.
0d43b60d
GM
772
773*** Generalized block selection and traversal
774
775A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
776(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
777which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
778`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
779point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
780(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
781
782If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
783i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
784backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
785the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
786
787*** Isearch support for updating mode line
788
789During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
790blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
791line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
792portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
793is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
794
795To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
796something like this in your .emacs.
797
798 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
799 (lambda ()
800 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
801
327652be
TTN
802*** New customization var: `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function'
803
804Normally, `hs-hide-all' hides everything, leaving only the
805header lines of top-level forms (and comments, unless var
806`hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is non-nil). It does this by
807moving point to each top-level block beginning and hiding the
808block there. In some major modes (for example, Java), this
809behavior results in few blocks left visible, which may not be so
810useful.
811
812You can now set var `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' to a
813function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead
814of the normal block-hiding function. For example, the following
815code defines a function to hide one level down and move point
816appropriately, and then tells hideshow to use the new function.
817
818(defun ttn-hs-hide-level-1 ()
819 (hs-hide-level 1)
820 (forward-sexp 1))
821(setq hs-hide-all-non-comment-function 'ttn-hs-hide-level-1)
822
823The name `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' was chosen to
824emphasize that this function is not called for comment blocks,
825only for code blocks.
826
827*** Command deleted: `hs-show-region'
828
829Historical Note: This command was added to handle "unbalanced
830parentheses" emergencies back when hideshow.el used selective
831display for implementation.
832
833*** Commands rebound to more conventional keys
834
835The hideshow commands used to be bound to keys of the form "C-c
836LETTER". This is contrary to the Emacs keybinding convention,
837which reserves that space for user modification. Here are the
838new bindings (which includes the addition of `hs-toggle-hiding'):
839
840 hs-hide-block C-c C-h
841 hs-show-block C-c C-s
842 hs-hide-all C-c C-M-h
843 hs-show-all C-c C-M-s
844 hs-hide-level C-c C-l
845 hs-toggle-hiding C-c C-c
846 hs-mouse-toggle-hiding [(shift button-2)]
847
848These were chosen to roughly imitate those used by Outline mode.
849
559cee90
DL
850** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
851
424d8b44 852+++
1b24b888
GM
853*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
854an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
855log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
856
424d8b44 857+++
1b24b888
GM
858**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
859current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
860
861+++
1b24b888
GM
862*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
863in a log file.
eb2aac9d 864
502004be 865+++
1b24b888
GM
866*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
867entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
eb2aac9d 868
502004be 869+++
1b24b888 870*** Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44
DL
871version number is performed based on regular expressions from
872`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
873Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 874
2c63c979 875*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 876
79c78e77
GM
877** Changes to cmuscheme
878
879*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
880`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
881
3476b54a
GM
882** Changes in Font Lock
883
884*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 885font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 886
2c63c979
SM
887*** multiline patterns are now supported.
888
a5e350c9
SM
889*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
890the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 891
601e0081
SM
892*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
893Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
894
b3b98592
GM
895** Comint (subshell) changes
896
988cded7
MB
897These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
898include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
899
900*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
901to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
902parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
903user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
904this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
905respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
906feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
907`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
908
909*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
910and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
911
988cded7 912*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
913buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
914buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
915
916The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
917M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
918the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
919
988cded7
MB
920*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
921and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
922see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 923
988cded7 924*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
925saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
926argument, it appends to the file.
927
988cded7 928*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
929(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
930compatibility.
931
0e40b809
EL
932*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
933ring (history).
d648cc45 934
e26cec67
GM
935** Changes to Rmail mode
936
c0510d27
GM
937*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
938set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
939receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
940recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
941`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
942as correspondent.
943
944Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
945mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 946regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 947
3b55acc9
GM
948*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
949to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
950Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
951with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
952for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
953
6a1950ec
GM
954*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
955like `j'.
956
5bb6f079
RS
957*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
958specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 959digest message.
e26cec67 960
993d8b7d
DL
961*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
962in which folder to put messages automatically.
963
400a1ed0
GM
964** Changes to TeX mode
965
a5e350c9 966*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
967`latex-mode'.
968
a5e350c9
SM
969*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
970
971*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
972
973*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 974
a933dad1
DL
975** Changes to RefTeX mode
976
977*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
978 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
979 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
980 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
981 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
982 can be edited from that buffer.
983
984*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
985 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
986 `A' to use all marked entries).
987
988*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
989 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
990
991*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
992 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
993 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
994 been cited.
995
38de9631
GM
996** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
997The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
998semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
999in column 1 are always made leaves.
1000
a933dad1
DL
1001** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1002has the following new features:
1003
1004*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1005may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1006to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1007time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1008
1009*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1010feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1011file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1012compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1013pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1014defaults to 1.
1015
5d94f558 1016** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1017file names.
1018
424d8b44 1019+++
a933dad1
DL
1020** Tooltips.
1021
1022Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
01242779
DL
1023mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
1024turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
a933dad1
DL
1025
1026Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
1027variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
1028the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
1029tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
1030
424d8b44 1031+++
a933dad1
DL
1032** Customize changes
1033
1034*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
1035`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
1036cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1037
1038*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1039Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1040default).
1041
0ae51efb
GM
1042*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
1043between custom options. Example:
1044
1045 (defcustom default-input-method nil
1046 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
1047 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
1048 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
1049 :group 'mule
1050 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
1051 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
1052
1053This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
1054current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
1055first in a custom-set-variables statement.
1056
a933dad1
DL
1057** New features in evaluation commands
1058
5e03eb84 1059*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1060modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1061print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1062customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1063eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1064
5e03eb84
GM
1065*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1066code when called with a prefix argument.
1067
ead53494
GM
1068** Ispell changes
1069
37d8a691 1070+++
bbe15990
EZ
1071*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1072transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1073spell-checks the current buffer.
1074
37d8a691 1075+++
385ff9e3
GM
1076*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1077added.
1078
1079*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1080correction is made and re-checked.
1081
74ec6045 1082*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1083
1084*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1085cases.
1086
1087*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1088on syntax errors.
1089
1090*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1091end of the buffer.
1092
a933dad1
DL
1093** Dired changes
1094
1095*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1096command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1097is, delete only empty directories.
1098
1099*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1100command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1101copy directories recursively.
1102
f6737cde
GM
1103*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1104in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1105the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1106
2f72fd2f
GM
1107*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1108replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1109directory.
1110
7381ae05
MB
1111*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1112a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1113This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1114will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1115accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1116
e024b101
GM
1117*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1118from ls switches.
1119
60b392a7
MB
1120*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1121of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1122which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1123source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1124
a933dad1
DL
1125** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1126use the -f option when sending mail.
1127
b1c609b1
GM
1128** CC mode changes.
1129
1130Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1131current user setups (although it's believed that these
1132incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1133However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1134back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1135compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1136release.
1137
7972fcfc
GM
1138*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1139This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1140of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1141non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1142want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1143have to bother.
1144
1145Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1146situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1147and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1148If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1149the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1150by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1151
b1c609b1
GM
1152*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1153When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1154variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1155take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1156is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1157settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1158possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1159Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1160
1161By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1162special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1163the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1164of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1165above.
1166
1167Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1168when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1169function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1170call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1171then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1172values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1173only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1174function documentation for more info.
1175
1176The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1177especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1178with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1179intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1180such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1181is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1182configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1183global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1184
1185(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1186
1187**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1188This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1189
1190This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1191variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1192completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1193the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1194empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1195style system.
1196
1197**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1198In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1199c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1200as far as possible.
1201
1202*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1203CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1204surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1205chapter about this in the manual.
1206
1207**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1208The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1209recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1210primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1211adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1212
1213**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1214This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1215c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1216
1217**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1218This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1219
1220It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1221Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1222A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1223inside CC Mode.
1224
1225Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1226causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1227the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1228available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1229cc-mode/).
1230
1231**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1232The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1233specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1234literals.
1235
1236**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1237It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1238prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1239you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1240this function.
1241
1242*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1243It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1244to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1245struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1246Thanks to Eric Eide.
1247
1248*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1249It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1250opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1251
1252**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1253
1254*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1255See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1256better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1257and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1258
1259*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1260previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1261the column specified by comment-column.
1262
1263*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1264In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1265is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1266prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1267contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1268don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1269
1270*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1271instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1272arguments.
1273
1274*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1275
1276*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1277c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1278c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1279variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1280Provan).
1281
1282*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1283
c407c570
GM
1284** Makefile mode changes
1285
1286*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1287
5d94f558 1288*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1289Fontlock mode is active.
1290
87be76f6
GM
1291** Isearch changes
1292
3353ef5a
GM
1293*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1294so that searches can be resumed.
1295
1296*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1297respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1298that started the search.
1299
87be76f6 1300*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1301selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1302
c8a8458a 1303+++
87be76f6
GM
1304*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1305
d35fce81 1306Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1307`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1308search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1309before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1310highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1311`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1312
1313The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1314will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1315Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1316using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1317usual snappy response.
1318
1319If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1320matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1321set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1322isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1323
21bc6203 1324+++
35384f06
GM
1325** Changes in sort.el
1326
1327The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1328as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1329new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1330numeric base.
87be76f6 1331
d7b511c4
GM
1332** Changes to Ange-ftp
1333
424d8b44 1334+++
d7b511c4 1335*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1336names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1337sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1338
d7b511c4
GM
1339*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1340ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1341
9d453139
SS
1342*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1343output ^M at the end of lines.
1344
4b9347b3
GM
1345** Shell script mode changes.
1346
1347Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1348derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1349sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1350
79214ddf
FP
1351** Etags changes.
1352
1353*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1354
aca0be23 1355*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1356possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1357{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1358This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1359a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1360
79214ddf
FP
1361*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1362declarations when given the --declarations option.
1363
1364*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1365"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1366
1367*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1368types.
1369
de370c4c 1370*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1371
1372*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1373
1374*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1375are now tagged.
1376
1377*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1378variables are tagged.
1379
1380*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1381
8dc78b52
FP
1382*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1383for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1384
c8d94f86 1385+++
f6737cde
GM
1386** Changes in etags.el
1387
3f6e4b8b
GM
1388*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1389tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1390is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1391
f6737cde
GM
1392*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1393the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1394
1395If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1396FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1397TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1398obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1399
1400TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1401
1402FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1403List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1404
1405A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1406
1407 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1408 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1409 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1410
1411*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1412of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1413
1414*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1415names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1416
424d8b44 1417+++
fbc164de
PE
1418** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1419and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1420LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1421
c3eb1f10 1422+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1423** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1424Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
14258859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
f6499c03
DL
1426GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet; there are basic 8859-14 and
14278859-15 fonts at <URL:http://czyborra.com/charsets/> and recent X
1428releases have 8859-15. There are new Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix
1429(only) and Polish slash input methods in Leim.
59c1bf85 1430
424d8b44 1431+++
163ea954 1432** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1433remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1434appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1435
1436** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1437
424d8b44 1438+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1439** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1440
6ab8d72d 1441+++
f6499c03 1442** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1443containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1444expression from that list, are not checked.
1445
5d94f558
SS
1446** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1447When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1448and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1449the buffer, just like for the local files.
1450
dc28878c
GM
1451** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1452
df8a9f78 1453+++
95931eb1
GM
1454** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1455displays local abbrevs, only.
1456
54baed30
GM
1457** VC Changes
1458
1459VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1460easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1461Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1462to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1463changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
1464`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of atoms that identify
1465version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1466each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1467file is registered in that backend.
1468
1469When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1470backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1471directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1472master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1473the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1474As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1475
1476The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1477still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1478RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1479vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1480where it doesn't make sense.)
1481
1482The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1483obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1484`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1485
1486*** General Changes
1487
1488The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1489checks are always done now.
1490
327652be 1491VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1492operations.
1493
c286608e
SM
1494`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1495`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1496`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1497
22933be8
AS
1498The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1499first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1500current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1501the working file (``merge news'').
1502
1503The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1504(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1505downwards.
1506
1507*** Multiple Backends
1508
1509VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1510useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1511repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1512commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1513local RCS archives.
1514
1515To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1516should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1517backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1518`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1519
1520If you have a file registered in one backend already, you can register
1521it in a second one by using C-x v i (vc-register) again.
1522Alternatively, you can commit changes to another backend (say, RCS),
1523by typing C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a
1524backend name as a revision number). When using the latter approach,
1525VC registers the file in the more local backend if that hasn't already
1526happened, and commits to a branch based on the current revision number
1527from the more remote backend.
1528
1529If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1530another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1531any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1532pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1533
1534After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1535changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1536local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1537buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1538
54baed30
GM
1539*** Changes for CVS
1540
1541There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1542default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1543remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1544by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1545regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1546that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1547queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1548
22933be8
AS
1549If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1550repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1551revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1552any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1553backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1554number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1555(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1556of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1557the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1558automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1559since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1560name.)
22933be8 1561
54baed30
GM
1562If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1563repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1564If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1565commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1566current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1567entire directory tree.
1568
1569The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1570"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1571is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1572"watched" by other developers.)
1573
22933be8
AS
1574The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1575(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
1576an empty argument to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
1577starting at the given directory.
1578
54baed30
GM
1579*** Lisp Changes in VC
1580
1581VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1582add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1583library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1584then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
1585a version system named FOO, you write a library named vc-foo.el, which
1586provides a number of functions vc-foo-... (see commentary at the end
1587of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
1588you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the atom
1589`FOO' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
1590
a933dad1
DL
1591** New modes and packages
1592
b95b34e5
GM
1593*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1594rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1595shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1596
1597Features are:
1598
1599- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1600 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1601 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1602 | / \
1603
1604- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1605 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1606 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1607 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1608 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1609 you are drawing.
1610
1611- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1612 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1613
1614- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1615 flood-filling.
1616
1617- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1618 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1619 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1620 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1621
b95b34e5
GM
1622- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1623 also do without the mouse.
1624
1625- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1626 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1627 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1628 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1629 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1630
1631- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1632
1633 lines straight-lines
1634 rectangles squares
1635 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1636 ellipses circles
1637 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1638 spray-can setting size for spraying
1639 vaporize line vaporize lines
1640 erase characters erase rectangles
1641
1642 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1643 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1644 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1645 drawing.
1646
1647 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1648 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1649 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1650 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1651
1652- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1653 can be turned off).
1654
4473cdd9
JW
1655+++
1656*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1657implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1658It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1659functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1660history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1661will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1662the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1663rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1664all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1665
ff332647 1666+++
90cbf47e
GM
1667*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1668intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1669typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1670on certain projects.
1671
894ca69e 1672+++
90cbf47e 1673*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1674regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1675
d96d6bb0 1676 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1677
1678will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1679face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1680typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1681Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1682appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1683current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1684corresponding file is read.
1685
424d8b44 1686+++
d96d6bb0 1687*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1688Emacs is idle.
1689
31fc5d15
GM
1690*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1691parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1692
5cb6a58e
SM
1693*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1694package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1695be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1696`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1697comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1698
424d8b44 1699+++
578979ee
GM
1700*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1701facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1702separate Texinfo file.
1703
424d8b44
DL
1704+++
1705*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1706by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1707provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1708`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1709enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1710
424d8b44 1711+++
6abca616
EZ
1712*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1713without invoking external programs.
1714
1715The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1716and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1717`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1718is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1719Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1720
1721The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1722page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1723
719e2c6e 1724+++
5e5dff44
GM
1725*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1726authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1727
1728The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1729the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1730the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1731Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1732even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1733single step.
1734
1735On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1736matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1737probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1738contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1739
424d8b44 1740+++
f7136ee8
GM
1741*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1742unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1743actually modifying content of a buffer.
1744
bbd9b566
GM
1745*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1746PostScript.
1747
1748Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1749
1750The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1751
1752 ; comment (until end of line)
1753 A non-terminal
1754 "C" terminal
1755 ?C? special
1756 $A default non-terminal
1757 $"C" default terminal
1758 $?C? default special
1759 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1760 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1761 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1762 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1763 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1764 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1765 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1766 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1767 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1768 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1769 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1770 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1771 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1772 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1773 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1774
1775Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1776
99453a38
GM
1777*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1778align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1779determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1780example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1781equal signs of assignments.
1782
424d8b44 1783+++
559cee90
DL
1784*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1785paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1786
424d8b44 1787+++
6448a6b3
GM
1788*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1789list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1790buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1791customize the package.
1792
6344985d
GM
1793*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1794
249652b1
GM
1795*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1796replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1797is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1798and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1799not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1800which answers different needs.
1801
424d8b44 1802+++
3476b54a
GM
1803*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1804suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1805expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1806course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1807reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1808to be enabled.
1809
424d8b44 1810+++
8964fec7
SM
1811*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1812containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1813
424d8b44 1814+++
a933dad1
DL
1815*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1816
424d8b44 1817+++
a933dad1
DL
1818*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1819
1820*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1821
8901d1ac
GM
1822Please note: if `ansi-color-for-shell-mode' and
1823`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
1824disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
1825`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
1826displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
1827and background colors.
1828
a933dad1
DL
1829*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1830Pascal) language.
1831
f6499c03 1832+++
a933dad1
DL
1833*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1834the text at point.
1835
1836*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1837
424d8b44 1838+++
8d54eb69
DL
1839*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1840
a933dad1
DL
1841*** whitespace.el ???
1842
ebcfda83
GM
1843*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1844files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1845(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1846interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1847often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1848uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1849codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1850
1851*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1852
1853Here is an example of columns:
1854
1855horse apple bus
1856dog pineapple car EXTRA
1857porcupine strawberry airplane
1858
1859Doing the following settings:
1860
1861 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1862 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1863 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1864 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1865
1866
1867Selecting the lines above and typing:
1868
1869 M-x delimit-columns-region
1870
1871It results:
1872
1873[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1874[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1875[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1876
1877delim-col has the following options:
1878
1879 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1880 before all columns.
1881
1882 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1883 between each column.
1884
1885 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1886 after all columns.
1887
1888 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1889 each column.
1890
1891delim-col has the following commands:
1892
1893 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1894 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1895
424d8b44 1896+++
f507826c 1897*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1898were operated on recently.
1899
1900M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1901
31fc5d15
GM
1902M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1903recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1904
31fc5d15
GM
1905M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1906filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1907file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1908
31fc5d15
GM
1909- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1910- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1911- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1912
31fc5d15
GM
1913The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1914dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1915
8062f458
DL
1916*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1917text.
1918
424d8b44 1919+++
36e24b82 1920*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1921of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1922specific to Message mode.
1923
424d8b44 1924+++
36e24b82
DL
1925*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1926viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1927with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1928
424d8b44 1929+++
aaa659ef
DL
1930*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1931interface to access directory servers using different directory
1932protocols. It has a separate manual.
1933
eee54b0e
DL
1934*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1935for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1936
424d8b44 1937+++
612839b6
GM
1938*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1939
5d94f558 1940*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1941minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1942
399da7e3
DL
1943*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1944with the diary features.
1945
6e417ca5
DL
1946*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1947numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1948
4a27bdfb
GM
1949*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1950Fill mode.
1951
60dd7e0e
DL
1952*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
1953Gnus facilities.
1954
dace60cf
JW
1955*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
1956facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
1957difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
1958they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 1959
965bc065
DL
1960+++
1961** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
1962paragraphs filled as you modify them.
1963
1964+++
1965** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
1966to be visited as images.
1967
a933dad1
DL
1968** Withdrawn packages
1969
1970*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1971functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1972
3261c1d8
DL
1973*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1974
1975*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1976
1977\f
01242779
DL
1978* Incompatible Lisp changes
1979
1980There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
1981may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
1982
1983** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
1984`(format %s foo)' no longer works to remove properties.
1985
1986** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
1987which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
1988may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
1989these properties are active.
1990
1991** The change in the treatment of non_ASCII characters in search
1992ranges may affect some code.
1993\f
ce75fd23
GM
1994* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1995(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1996
52d89894
GM
1997+++
1998** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
1999alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2000
4301cf66
DL
2001** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum",
2002currently using the `md5sum' program.
2003
6bc92b2e
GM
2004** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2005deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2006being deleted.
2007
39e776cd
SM
2008** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2009
a18a342d 2010+++
1396138a 2011** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2012If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2013skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2014with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2015C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2016charset.
2017
4fbdfdcf
MB
2018+++
2019** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2020the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2021message.
2022
6a0b0752
MB
2023** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2024expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2025
47e351a3
GM
2026** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2027with the more general `:mask' property.
2028
ba9eeda1
GM
2029** Image specifications accept more `:algorithm's.
2030
a2bd77b8
GM
2031** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2032backslash.
2033
424d8b44
DL
2034+++
2035** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2036is running in batch mode. For example,
2037
2038 (message "%s" (read t))
2039
2040will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2041to standard output.
2042
2043+++
2044** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2045`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2046
ead53494
GM
2047** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2048will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2049frame or window.
2050
f6499c03 2051+++
27848c01
GM
2052** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2053were added
2054
2055- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2056
2057Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
2058a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2059
2060- Function: remq ELT LIST
2061
2062Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
2063comparison is done with `eq'.
2064
2065** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2066
b548072f
GM
2067** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2068has been changed.
2069
424d8b44 2070+++
07b14857
KH
2071** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2072without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2073convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2074
9662da0b
GM
2075** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2076or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2077
7fce7efb
DL
2078** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2079function was declared obsolete.
2080
5d94f558 2081** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2082retained as an alias).
2083
f98d3086
SM
2084** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2085It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2086is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2087
87efd256
GM
2088** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2089
39b39373
GM
2090- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2091
2092Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2093omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2094the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2095even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2096minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2097means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2098
67c9a1d2
GM
2099** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2100
2101- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2102
2103Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2104
2105This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2106calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2107argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2108value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2109returned.
2110
2111Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2112if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2113it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2114minibuffer even if it is active.
2115
2116Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2117counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2118too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2119and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2120`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2121entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2122
2123ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2124ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2125ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2126ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2127ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2128If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2129Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2130
ead53494
GM
2131** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2132event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2133argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2134
25fa6deb
GM
2135** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2136call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2137message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2138Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2139
5d94f558 2140** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2141meaning no limit.
2142
5d94f558 2143** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2144coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2145DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2146
80c05bd3 2147** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
2148of a primitive.
2149
c286608e
SM
2150** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2151
80c05bd3
DL
2152** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2153buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2154This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2155than replacing the local map.
2156
4bc7a543
DL
2157** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
2158after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
2159
2160** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2161
f6499c03 2162+++
c286608e
SM
2163** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2164as promised long ago.
f0298744 2165
5d94f558 2166** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
2167\f
2168* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2169
2170Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2171--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2172When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2173so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2174
85c75536
MB
2175*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2176buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2177the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2178restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2179
0b8a3a6d
DL
2180*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2181`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
2182when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
2183multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2184
2185*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2186`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2187contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2188
2189*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2190changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2191[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2192regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2193the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2194extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2195bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2196eight-bit-graphic.
2197
2198** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2199
2200A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
2201a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2202character set as previously.
2203
2204*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2205They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2206modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2207
2208CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2209characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2210range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2211case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2212
2213FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
2214name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
2215
2216*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2217registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2218"fontset-default".
2219
2220*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2221argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2222
2223** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2224composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2225buffers and strings.
2226
2227*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2228character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2229code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2230have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2231composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2232composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2233The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2234also been deleted.
2235
2236*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2237specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2238`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2239
2240*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2241MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2242composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2243may differ between buffer and string text.
2244
2245*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2246COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2247
2248*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2249directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2250Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2251`composition' from STRING.
2252
2253*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2254a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2255
2256*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2257obsolete.
2258
965bc065 2259** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
f620908e 2260`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' are introduced
965bc065 2261for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, U+2500..U+33FF,
f620908e 2262U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2263
2264** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
2265`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
2266X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2267
2268+++
2269** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2270are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 22710xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2272
399da7e3 2273+++
f0124b4a
DL
2274** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2275that offset in the file before writing.
2276
f98d3086
SM
2277** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2278compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2279
612839b6
GM
2280** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2281`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2282from which the command was issued.
2283
2284** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2285`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2286`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2287additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2288operate on.
2289
271b4185
GM
2290** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2291to `window-buffer-height'.
2292
2293- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2294
2295Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2296The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2297lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2298
2299Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2300respectively.
2301
2302If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
2303COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2304
2305The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2306obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2307on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2308
2309Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2310buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2311possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2312is currently displayed in some window.
2313
3c30cb6e
DL
2314** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2315argument function's results.
2316
62f20204
GM
2317** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2318signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2319
c0510d27 2320** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2321header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2322
2323** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2324ignores differences in case and text representation.
2325
2326** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2327cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2328as follows:
2329
2330 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2331 nil don't display a cursor
2332 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2333 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2334 others display a box cursor.
2335
9a0dd3dc
GM
2336** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2337an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2338defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2339set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2340
d7b511c4 2341** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2342specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2343the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2344text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2345
2346Example:
2347
2348 (string-to-syntax "()")
2349 => (4 . 41)
2350
1fa28578
GM
2351** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2352other than 10.
2353
2354*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2355INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2356
5d94f558 2357 #b1111
1fa28578 2358 => 15
5d94f558 2359 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2360 => -15
2361
2362*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2363
5d94f558 2364 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2365 => 438
2366
2367*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2368
5d94f558 2369 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2370 => 48815
2371
2372*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2373
5d94f558 2374 #2R-111
1fa28578 2375 => -7
5d94f558 2376 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2377 => 267
2378
3d4ff2dd 2379** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2380the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2381and isn't a string.
2382
3d4ff2dd
GM
2383** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2384a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2385value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2386not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2387
16ce590d
DL
2388+++
2389** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2390
73825616 2391** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2392for a regexp in a string.
2393
2394** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2395`mouse-position-function'.
2396
723e779c
GM
2397** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2398that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2399
d1e103b2
GM
2400** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2401Keywords are now always considered constants.
2402
31047e0d
DL
2403+++
2404** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2405returns it.
2406
7a85e4df
GM
2407** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2408returned by function `recent-keys'.
2409
02b14400
RS
2410+++
2411** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2412can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2413Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2414etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2415mode.
404fa7d6 2416
02b14400 2417+++
8964fec7
SM
2418** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2419and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2420
02b14400
RS
2421+++
2422** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2423has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2424function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2425returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2426been performed."
2427
2428When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2429and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2430hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2431then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2432
02b14400 2433+++
81da8b32
GM
2434** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2435In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2436and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2437
02b14400 2438+++
9e207b90
GM
2439** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2440with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2441specified table.
2442
2443 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2444
2445Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2446TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2447saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2448what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2449
02b14400 2450+++
d7f89643 2451** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2452Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
601e0081
SM
2453Also backreferences like \2 are now considered as an error if the
2454corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2455Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2456
02b14400 2457+++
dde9e75a
GM
2458** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2459removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2460
02b14400 2461+++
9da30515
GM
2462** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2463instead of being optional.
2464
02b14400 2465+++
d20679eb
GM
2466** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2467modify read-only text.
2468
02b14400 2469+++
fbc164de
PE
2470** New functions and variables for locales.
2471
2472The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2473decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2474time functions like strftime. The new variables
2475`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2476locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2477
2478The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2479environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2480the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2481environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2482not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2483`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2484`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2485
02b14400 2486+++
863476d1
SM
2487** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2488To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2489modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2490start sequences.
2491
02b14400 2492+++
ef6d912c
GM
2493** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2494because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2495
02b14400 2496+++
a933dad1
DL
2497** New function `propertize'
2498
2499The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2500strings with text properties.
2501
2502- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2503
2504Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2505by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2506PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2507specified value of that property. Example:
2508
2509 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2510
2511+++
2512** push and pop macros.
2513
02b14400
RS
2514Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2515are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2516as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2517
2518(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2519(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2520 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2521
02b14400
RS
2522** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2523
6c7fd5aa
RS
2524Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2525are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2526
2527(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2528 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2529 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2530 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2531
2532(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2533 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2534 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2535 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2536
a933dad1
DL
2537+++
2538** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
2539as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
2540
2541[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2542[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2543[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2544[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2545[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2546 space, and DEL.
2547[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2548 and DEL.
2549[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2550 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2551 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2552[:alpha:] matches letters.
2553 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2554 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2555[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2556[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2557[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2558[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2559 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2560 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2561[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2562[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2563[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2564
2565+++
2566** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2567
2568The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2569
2570- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2571
2572The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2573are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2574
2575:test TEST
2576
2577TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2578Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2579it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2580
2581:size SIZE
2582
2583SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2584many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2585
2586:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2587
2588REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2589full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2590size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
25911.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2592old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2593
2594:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2595
2596THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2597hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2598(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2599
2600:weakness WEAK
2601
b548072f
GM
2602WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2603`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2604`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2605collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2606outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2607
2608- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2609
2610Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2611
2612- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2613
2614Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2615
2616- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2617
2618Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2619values are shared.
2620
2621- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2622
2623Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2624
2625- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2626
2627Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2628
2629- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2630
2631Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2632
2633- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2634
2635Returns the size of TABLE.
2636
d96d6bb0 2637- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2638
2639Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2640
2641- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2642
2643Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2644
2645- Function: clrhash TABLE
2646
2647Clear TABLE.
2648
2649- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2650
2651Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2652not found.
2653
79214ddf 2654- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2655
2656Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2657another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2658
2659- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2660
2661Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2662
2663- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2664
2665Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2666arguments KEY and VALUE.
2667
2668- Function: sxhash OBJ
2669
2670Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2671
2672- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2673
2674Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2675a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2676comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2677and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2678of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2679
2680TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2681
2682HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2683code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2684integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2685
2686Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2687be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2688
2689 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2690 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2691
2692 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2693 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2694
79214ddf 2695 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2696 'case-fold-string-hash))
2697
2698 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2699
2700+++
2701** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2702
2703It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2704circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2705a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2706
2707+++
2708** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2709
2710If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2711#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2712
a933dad1
DL
2713+++
2714** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2715t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2716specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2717is too short to reach that column.
2718
2719+++
2720** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2721now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2722after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2723two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2724
2725If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2726perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2727and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2728
2729+++
2730** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2731to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2732
2733+++
2734** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2735calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2736
2737+++
2738** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2739directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2740small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2741small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2742temporary-file-directory instead.
2743
2744+++
2745** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2746the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2747`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2748hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2749
2750+++
2751** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2752elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2753
2754+++
2755** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2756
2757make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2758creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2759ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2760
2761+++
2762** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2763
2764The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2765on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2766is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2767never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2768ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2769overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2770
2771If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2772that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2773to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2774The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2775
2776+++
2777** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2778
2779Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2780If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2781ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2782result string.
2783
2784Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2785string where arguments appear in the result string.
2786
2787Example:
2788
2789 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2790 (s2 "world"))
2791 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2792 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2793 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2794
2795results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2796
2797+++
2798** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2799
2800Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2801The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2802argument in it.
2803
2804 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2805 (arg "world"))
2806 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2807 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2808 (message msg arg))
2809
2810+++
2811** Sound support
2812
2813Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2814(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2815
2816Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2817(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2818to enable sound support.
2819
2820Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2821list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2822when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2823functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2824sound to play, before playing the sound.
2825
2826The following sound properties are supported:
2827
2828- `:file FILE'
2829
2830FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2831searched relative to `data-directory'.
2832
6fb40beb
GM
2833- `:data DATA'
2834
2835DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2836may be present, but not both.
2837
a933dad1
DL
2838- `:volume VOLUME'
2839
2840VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
28410..1. This property is optional.
2842
01242779
DL
2843- `:device DEVICE'
2844
2845DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
2846sound. The default device is system-dependent.
2847
a933dad1
DL
2848Other properties are ignored.
2849
01242779
DL
2850An alternative interface is called as
2851(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
2852
a933dad1 2853** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2854
2855** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2856a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2857
2858** Changes to garbage collection
2859
2860*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2861of live and free strings.
2862
2863*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2864strings that have been consed so far.
2865
a933dad1 2866\f
04545643
GM
2867* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2868Lisp Manual
2869
f7eb32aa 2870+++
a299a6f0
GM
2871** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
2872mini-windows.
2873
2874** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third argument, FULLY.
ea4c1b7c
MB
2875If FULLY is non-nil, then locations that are partially obscured aren't
2876considered visible.
2877
a299a6f0 2878** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 2879
9a8d84ca
DL
2880+++
2881** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2882
2883** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2884image.
2885
2886- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2887
2888Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2889
2890SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2891measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2892character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2893font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2894FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2895
ebb8f116
GM
2896** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
2897has a mask bitmap.
2898
2899- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
2900
2901Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
2902FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
2903or omitted means use the selected frame.
2904
f6499c03 2905+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
2906** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2907satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2908
2909+++
2910** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2911optional.
2912
f6499c03
DL
2913+++
2914** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
2915below).
04545643
GM
2916
2917\f
a933dad1
DL
2918* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2919
2920Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2921--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2922When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2923so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2924
f6d3257b
GM
2925** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2926to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2927
2928Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2929text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2930is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2931your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2932laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2933just display it black instead.
2934
2935This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2936a line like
2937
2938 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2939
2940in your `.emacs'.
2941
a933dad1
DL
2942** New face implementation.
2943
2944Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2945font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2946
2947+++
2948*** New faces.
2949
2950Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2951
2952 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2953
a933dad1
DL
2954 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2955 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2956
a933dad1 2957 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2958
a933dad1 2959 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2960
a933dad1 2961 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2962
a933dad1 2963 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2964
a933dad1
DL
2965 7. Background color.
2966
2967 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2968
2969 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2970
2971 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2972
2973 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2974
2975 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2976 color.
2977
2978 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2979 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2980
2981Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2982same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2983frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2984faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2985with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2986attributes mentioned above.
2987
2988There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2989definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2990created frames.
79214ddf 2991
a933dad1
DL
2992A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2993have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2994`fully-specified'.
2995
2996+++
2997*** Face merging.
2998
2999The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3000combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3001aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3002properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3003that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3004results in a fully-specified face.
3005
3006+++
3007*** Face realization.
3008
3009After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3010merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3011realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3012available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3013face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3014cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3015
3016Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3017character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3018for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3019charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3020
3021Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3022specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3023being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3024the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3025statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3026
3027In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3028`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
30290x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3030the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3031initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3032Emacs.
3033
3034Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3035`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3036registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3037with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3038
a7c13351 3039+++
a933dad1
DL
3040**** Clearing face caches.
3041
3042The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3043on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3044unused fonts.
3045
3046+++
3047*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3048
a933dad1
DL
3049Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3050given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3051for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3052
3053If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3054pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3055family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3056property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3057an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3058
3059Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3060against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3061match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3062
3063Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3064
3065The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3066attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3067face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3068names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3069that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3070width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3071to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3072
52d89894
GM
3073Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3074alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
3075doesn't exist. Likewise, `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows to
3076specify alternative font registry names to try.
a933dad1
DL
3077
3078+++
3079**** Scalable fonts
3080
3081Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3082since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3083servers.
3084
3085To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3086`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3087scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3088Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3089scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3090that list. Example:
3091
3092 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3093
3094allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3095
3096+++
3097*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3098
3099- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3100
3101Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3102is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3103string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3104
3105If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3106the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3107FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3108POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3109SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3110These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3111if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3112REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3113the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3114of the face font sort order.
3115
79214ddf 3116- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3117
3118Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3119omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3120(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3121non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3122
3123- Variable: font-list-limit
3124
3125Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3126won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3127matching font. The default is currently 100.
3128
3129+++
3130*** Setting face attributes.
3131
3132For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3133with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3134implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3135`face-attribute'.
3136
3137Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3138symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3139
3140The following attributes are recognized:
3141
3142`:family'
3143
3144VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3145or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3146and `?' are allowed.
3147
3148`:width'
3149
3150VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3151It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3152`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3153`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3154
3155`:height'
3156
787345ff
MB
3157VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3158in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3159scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3160height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3161
3162`:weight'
3163
3164VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3165symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3166`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3167
3168`:slant'
3169
3170VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3171symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3172`reverse-oblique'.
3173
3174`:foreground', `:background'
3175
3176VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3177
3178`:underline'
3179
3180VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3181VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3182a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3183don't underline.
3184
3185`:overline'
3186
3187VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3188VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3189string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3190overline.
3191
3192`:strike-through'
3193
3194VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3195striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3196face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3197is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3198
3199`:box'
3200
3201VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3202around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3203VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3204of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3205and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3206VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3207:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3208the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3209specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3210defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3211the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3212color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3213should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3214like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3215that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3216the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3217box.
3218
3219`:inverse-video'
3220
3221VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3222inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3223
3224`:stipple'
3225
3226If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3227The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3228searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3229HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3230is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3231explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3232
3233For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3234and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3235
3236`:font'
3237
3238Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3239XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3240is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3241versions of Emacs.
3242
3243For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3244be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3245must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3246
3247Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3248`defface'.
3249
787345ff
MB
3250`:inherit'
3251
3252VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3253of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3254like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3255
a933dad1
DL
3256*** Face attributes and X resources
3257
3258The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3259from X resources:
3260
3261 Face attribute X resource class
3262-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3263 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3264 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3265 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3266 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3267 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3268 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3269 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3270 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3271 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3272 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3273 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3274 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3275 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3276 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3277 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3278 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3279 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3280 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3281 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3282
3283+++
3284*** Text property `face'.
3285
3286The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3287specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3288specification can be
3289
32901. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3291
32922. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3293 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3294 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3295 for face attribute names.
3296
32973. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3298 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3299 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3300
3301+++
3302** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3303
acf3ecb7
EZ
3304The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3305on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3306the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3307default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3308`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3309used to clear the mapping table.
3310
acf3ecb7
EZ
3311** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3312
3313The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3314and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3315type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3316color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3317display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3318old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3319`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3320compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3321should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3322modify their color-related behavior.
3323
3324The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3325any frame type.
3326
8a5719f0
EZ
3327** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3328
3329The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3330`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3331`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3332`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3333`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3334`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3335display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3336the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3337platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3338
a933dad1
DL
3339+++
3340** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3341
463cac2d 3342This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3343To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3344the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3345`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1
DL
3346
3347The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
3348end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3349Otherwise, it returns zero.
3350
463cac2d
GM
3351** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3352
3353There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3354buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3355property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3356
9a9dfda8 3357Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3358forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3359to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3360not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3361commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3362boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3363`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3364functions.
463cac2d
GM
3365
3366Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3367a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3368editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3369
9a9dfda8
GM
3370The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3371
59927f88 3372- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3373
3374Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3375
9a9dfda8
GM
3376A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3377If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
3378constrained position if that is is different.
3379
3380If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3381positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3382ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3383constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3384as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3385is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3386fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3387the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3388also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3389
3390If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3391NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3392unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3393C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3394only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3395
59927f88
MB
3396If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3397a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3398
3399Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3400
3401- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3402
59927f88 3403Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3404A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3405If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3406
3407- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3408
3409Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3410A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3411If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3412If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3413field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3414
3415- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3416
3417Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3418A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3419If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3420If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3421then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3422
3423- Function: field-string &optional POS
3424
3425Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3426A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3427If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3428
3429- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3430
3431Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3432A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3433If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3434
a933dad1
DL
3435+++
3436** Image support.
3437
3438Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3439strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3440(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3441replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3442
3443If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3444`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3445AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3446window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3447area.
3448
3449IMAGE is an image specification.
3450
3451*** Image specifications
3452
3453Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3454is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3455specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3456symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3457described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3458
3459The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3460
3461`:ascent ASCENT'
3462
576da55d
GM
3463ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3464If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3465to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3466
3467If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3468image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3469
5d94f558 3470If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3471centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3472of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3473overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3474
3475`:margin MARGIN'
3476
79214ddf 3477MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
3478margin around the image. Default is 0.
3479
3480`:relief RELIEF'
3481
3482RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3483around an image.
3484
3485`:algorithm ALGO'
3486
47e351a3
GM
3487Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3488
3489ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3490edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3491
3492ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3493apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3494nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3495position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3496around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3497neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3498transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3499x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3500below.
3501
3502 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3503 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3504 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3505
3506The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3507resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3508multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3509of the factors' absolute values.
3510
327652be 3511Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3512
47e351a3
GM
3513 (1 0 0
3514 0 0 0
3515 9 9 -1)
3516
3517Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3518
3519 ( 2 -1 0
3520 -1 0 1
3521 0 1 -2)
3522
ba9eeda1
GM
3523ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3524``disabled''.
3525
47e351a3
GM
3526`:mask MASK'
3527
3528If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3529the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3530image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3531background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
3532image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from the corners is
3533the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3534GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3535image.
a933dad1 3536
47e351a3
GM
3537If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3538in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3539`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3540
3541`:file FILE'
3542
3543Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3544search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3545building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3546may be present in the image specification.
3547
518df5c4
GM
3548`:data DATA'
3549
3550Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3551supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3552present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3553support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3554
a933dad1
DL
3555*** Supported image types
3556
b246b1f6 3557**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3558
3559XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3560properties supported are
3561
3562`:foreground FG'
3563
3564FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3565is the frame's foreground.
3566
46c5af7f 3567`:background BG'
a933dad1
DL
3568
3569BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3570the frame's background color.
3571
3572XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3573case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3574instead of a `:file' property.
3575
3576`:width WIDTH'
3577
3578WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3579
3580`:height HEIGHT'
3581
3582HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3583
3584`:data DATA'
3585
3586DATA must be either
3587
3588 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3589 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3590
3591 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3592
3593 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3594 bitmap.
3595
c76e04a8
GM
3596 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3597 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3598 in the file.
3599
a933dad1
DL
3600**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3601
3602XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3603`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3604found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3605`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3606
3607Additional image properties supported are:
3608
3609`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3610
3611SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3612name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3613name.
3614
3615XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3616add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3617
a933dad1
DL
3618The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3619to display compressed images.
3620
3621**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3622
3623PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3624mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3625mono images are
3626
3627`:foreground FG'
3628
3629FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
3630is the frame's foreground.
3631
3632`:background FG'
3633
3634BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
3635the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3636
3637**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
3638
3639Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
3640package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3641are:
3642
a933dad1
DL
3643**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3644
3645Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3646package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3647properties defined.
3648
3649**** GIF, image type `gif'
3650
3651Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3652`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3653
3654Additional image properties supported are:
3655
3656`:index INDEX'
3657
3658INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3659multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3660
3661This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3662For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3663at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3664every 0.1 seconds.
3665
3666(defun show-anim (file max)
3667 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3668 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3669
3670(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3671 (when (= idx max)
3672 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3673 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3674 (save-excursion
3675 (set-buffer buffer)
3676 (goto-char (point-min))
3677 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3678 (insert-image img "x"))
3679 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3680
3681**** PNG, image type `png'
3682
3683Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3684package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3685properties defined.
3686
3687**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3688
3689Additional image properties supported are:
3690
3691`:pt-width WIDTH'
3692
3693WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3694integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3695
3696`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3697
3698HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3699must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3700
3701`:bounding-box BOX'
3702
3703BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3704the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3705files. This is an required property.
3706
3707Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3708lisp/gs.el.
3709
3710*** Lisp interface.
3711
79214ddf
FP
3712The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3713which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3714
3715Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3716they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3717The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3718manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3719images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3720
3721*** Simplified image API, image.el
3722
3723The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3724creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3725can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3726define an image based on available image types. The functions
3727`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3728buffer.
3729
3730+++
3731** Display margins.
3732
3733Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3734and images.
3735
3736To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3737`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3738`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3739obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3740`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3741the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3742of the display margins.
3743
3744You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3745containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3746one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3747string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3748in this file).
3749
3750+++
3751** Help display
3752
3753Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3754moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3755`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3756that have a `help-echo' property.
3757
9662da0b 3758If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3759is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3760the window in which the help was found.
3761
3762If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3763`help-echo' text property was found.
3764
3765If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3766POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3767
3768If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3769the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3770mouse.
d5aa31d8 3771
9662da0b
GM
3772If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3773string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3774
3775For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3776determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3777property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3778For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3779used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3780
3781The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3782the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3783causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3784
3785+++
3786** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3787
3788The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3789This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3790
3791The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3792scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3793The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3794scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3795used.
3796
79214ddf
FP
3797 (global-set-key [A-down]
3798 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3799 (interactive)
79214ddf 3800 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3801 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3802 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3803 #'(lambda ()
3804 (interactive)
79214ddf 3805 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3806 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3807
3808+++
3809** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3810
3811Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3812when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3813variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3814is called with one argument, POS.
3815
3816At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3817characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3818as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3819property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3820`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3821
3822+++
3823** Tool bar support.
3824
3825Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3826parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3827controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3828suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3829`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3830automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3831
3832*** Tool bar item definitions
3833
3834Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3835`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3836where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3837
a933dad1
DL
3838CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3839evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3840the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3841property (see below).
79214ddf 3842
a933dad1
DL
3843BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3844binding are currently ignored.
3845
3846The following properties are recognized:
3847
3848`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3849
a933dad1
DL
3850FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3851or disabled.
79214ddf 3852
a933dad1 3853`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3854
a933dad1 3855FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3856
a933dad1
DL
3857`:filter FUNCTION'
3858
3859FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3860FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3861used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3862
a933dad1
DL
3863`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3864
3865TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3866and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3867
a933dad1
DL
3868`:image IMAGES'
3869
3870IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3871image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3872meaning of each of the four elements:
3873
3874 Index Use when item is
3875 ----------------------------------------
3876 0 enabled and selected
3877 1 enabled and deselected
3878 2 disabled and selected
3879 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3880
4ba7246d
GM
3881If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3882algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3883
a933dad1 3884`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3885
a933dad1
DL
3886Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3887is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3888
dab96841 3889The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
3890toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
3891to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
3892menu bar.
dab96841 3893
8628686a
DL
3894The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
3895dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
3896buffer-locally to override the global map.
3897
a933dad1
DL
3898*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3899
3900If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3901resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3902than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3903
79214ddf 3904If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3905raised when the mouse moves over them.
3906
3907You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3908`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3909pixels. Default is 1.
3910
3911You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3912`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3913
3914*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3915
3916You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3917a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3918
3919 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3920 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3921 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3922
3923is the original tool bar item definition, then
3924
3925 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3926
3927makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3928item.
3929
3930** Mode line changes.
3931
3932+++
3933*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3934
3935The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3936that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3937a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3938
39391. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3940a `local-map' text property.
3941
39422. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3943that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3944
39453. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3946is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3947`local-map' property.
3948
3949The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3950properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3951example.
3952
54522c9f
GM
3953*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3954evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3955
a933dad1
DL
3956+++
3957*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3958variable mode-line-format to nil.
3959
3960+++
3961*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3962
3963This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3964`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3965completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3966`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3967line.
3968
3969The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3970`header-line'.
3971
3972The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3973position in the header-line.
3974
3975+++
3976** Text property `display'
3977
623a0aae
GM
3978The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
3979replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
3980also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
3981the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
3982below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3983
623a0aae
GM
3984*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
3985
3986To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
3987text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
3988
3989If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
3990marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
3991the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
3992is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3993simpler form STRING as property value.
3994
a933dad1
DL
3995*** Variable width and height spaces
3996
3997To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3998specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3999`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4000area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4001marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4002displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4003simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4004
4005The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4006PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4007properties described below.
4008
4009The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4010characters having the `display' property.
4011
4012- :width WIDTH
4013
4014Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4015character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4016
4017- :relative-width FACTOR
4018
4019Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4020first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4021same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4022width of that character by FACTOR.
4023
4024- :align-to HPOS
4025
4026Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4027value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4028
4029Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4030
4031- :height HEIGHT
4032
4033Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4034normal line height.
4035
4036- :relative-height FACTOR
4037
4038The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4039of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4040
4041- :ascent ASCENT
4042
4043Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4044used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4045baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4046equal to 100.
4047
4048You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4049
4050*** Images
4051
4052A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4053. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4054in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4055their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4056the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4057`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4058area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4059the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4060as display specification.
4061
4062*** Other display properties
4063
c9e73000 4064- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4065
4066Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4067should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4068integer or float.
4069
c9e73000 4070- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4071
4072Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4073
4074If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4075means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4076the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4077``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4078a font is available counts as a step.
4079
4080If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4081as tall as the frame's default font.
4082
4083If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4084height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4085
4086Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4087`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4088
c9e73000 4089- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4090
4091FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4092font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4093raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4094amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4095`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4096
4097*** Conditional display properties
4098
4099All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4100has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4101applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
4102During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
4103the text having the `display' property.
4104
4105The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4106`(:when t SPEC)'.
4107
4108+++
4109** New menu separator types.
4110
4111Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4112item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4113treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4114to specify other menu separator types.
4115
4116- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4117
4118No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4119separator occurs.
4120
4121- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4122
4123A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4124
4125- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4126
4127A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4128
4129- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4130
4131A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4132
4133- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4134
4135A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4136
4137- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4138
4139A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
4140displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4141
4142- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4143
4144A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4145
4146- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4147
4148A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4149
4150- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4151
4152A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4153
4154- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4155
4156Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4157
4158- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4159
4160Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4161
4162- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4163
4164Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4165
4166- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4167
4168Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4169
4170Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4171the corresponding single-line separators.
4172
4173+++
4174** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4175
4176The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4177`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4178Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4179that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4180default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4181default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4182default foreground is black.
4183
4184The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4185(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4186`ScrollBarBackground').
4187
4188Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4189settings for scroll bar colors.
4190
4191+++
4192** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4193display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4194
4195---
4196** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4197starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4198on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4199line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4200the original window start.
4201
4202---
4203** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4204`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4205now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4206
4207+++
4208** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4209
4210A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4211`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4212windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4213other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4214
4215The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4216fixed-width and fixed-height.
4217
4218 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4219
4220A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4221fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4222window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4223change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4224temporarily to nil, for example
4225
4226 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4227 (enlarge-window 10))
4228
79214ddf 4229Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4230or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4231
4232** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4233terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4234to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4235overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4236horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4237support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4238
3787e12e 4239
79dfd2cd 4240\f
3787e12e
GM
4241* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4242
4243** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4244input.
4245
4246** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4247
4248** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4249
4250** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4251only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4252exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4253(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4254(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4255
4256** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4257been added.
4258
79dfd2cd 4259\f
3787e12e
GM
4260* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4261
4262** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4263
79dfd2cd 4264\f
3787e12e
GM
4265* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4266
4267** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4268M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
4269\f
4270* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4271
4272** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4273
4274You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4275Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4276`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4277
4278If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4279is the one that is used.
4280
4281** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4282the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4283Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4284separate from the command's regular output.
4285Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4286says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4287In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4288the buffer name.
4289
4290When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4291output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4292it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4293cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4294
4295** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4296the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4297is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4298created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4299
4300** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4301example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4302match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4303quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4304
4305** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4306now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4307if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4308they never ignore case.
4309
4310** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4311under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4312applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4313of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4314just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4315convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4316part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4317
4318If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4319the same format that was used in the file before.
4320
4321You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4322`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4323
4324** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4325renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4326This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4327
4328** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4329The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4330buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4331your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4332is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4333end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4334Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4335
4336The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4337eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4338control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4339format. You can now customize these variables.
4340
4341** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4342filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4343filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4344enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4345
4346** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4347in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4348windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4349
4350** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4351dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4352doesn't have any effect.
4353
4354** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4355not one per buffer.
4356
4357** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4358use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4359 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4360
4361** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4362To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4363`auto-show-mode' command.
4364
4365** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4366avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4367versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4368choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4369occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4370
4371** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4372cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4373
4374** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4375character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4376feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4377
4378** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4379the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4380interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4381and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4382
4383** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4384
4385The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4386that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4387one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4388codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4389set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4390
4391Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4392from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4393
4394IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4395equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4396a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4397`?' on other systems.
4398
4399IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4400feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4401Unix.
4402
4403Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4404current codepage when it starts.
4405
4406** Mail changes
4407
4408*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4409`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4410appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4411non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4412MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4413headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4414latin-1:
4415
4416 MIME-version: 1.0
4417 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4418 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4419
4420*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4421default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4422default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4423sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4424buffer-file-coding-system.
4425
4426You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4427sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4428mail.
4429
4430*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4431if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4432Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4433list of possible coding systems.
4434
4435** CC Mode changes
4436
4437*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4438modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4439longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4440docstring for details.
4441
4442*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4443symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4444found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4445prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4446lineup functions use this feature currently.
4447
4448*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4449"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4450
4451*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4452"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4453
4454*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4455from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4456symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4457c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4458anonymous classes.
4459
4460*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4461syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4462
4463*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4464inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4465support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4466function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4467
4468*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4469(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4470brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4471c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4472(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4473
4474*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4475
4476*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4477
4478*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4479for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4480
4481*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4482
4483*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4484associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4485This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4486circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4487class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4488
4489** Gnus changes.
4490
4491*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4492added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4493Gnus manual for the full story.
4494
4495*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4496before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4497group, which is created automatically.
4498
4499*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4500values.
4501
4502*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4503
4504*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4505outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4506
4507*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4508`C-u C-c C-c'.
4509
4510*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4511
4512*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4513re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4514
4515*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4516
4517*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4518Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4519
4520*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4521`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4522
4523*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4524control over simplification.
4525
4526*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4527
4528*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4529limit.
4530
4531*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4532
4533*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4534
4535*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4536If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4537rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4538
4539*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
4540`a' forces normal posting method.
4541
4542*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4543-- `W d'.
4544
4545*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4546to a non-nil value.
4547
4548*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4549where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4550
4551*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4552has been added.
4553
4554*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4555
4556*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4557
4558*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4559`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4560
4561*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4562`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4563
4564*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4565
4566*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4567been added.
4568
4569*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4570`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4571
4572*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4573updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4574
4575*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4576
4577*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4578
4579*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4580
4581** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4582
4583*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4584options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4585nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4586
4587*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4588TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4589of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4590TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4591can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4592
4593*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4594All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4595but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4596the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4597
4598*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4599the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4600buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4601mismatch.
4602
4603** Changes to RefTeX mode
4604
4605*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4606file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4607
4608*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4609lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4610characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4611removed from the label.
4612
4613*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4614a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4615
4616*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4617customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4618
4619*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4620`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4621expressions.
4622
4623*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4624
4625** New/deleted modes and packages
4626
4627*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4628SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4629
4630*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
4631editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
4632SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
4633
4634*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
4635changes with a special face.
4636
4637*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
4638this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
4639Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
4640\f
4641* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
4642
4643** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
4644This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
4645conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
4646and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
4647check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
4648
4649The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
4650Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
4651distribution when the config.bat script is run.
4652
4653** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
4654MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
4655controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
4656directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
4657Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
4658on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
4659string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
4660program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
4661printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4662
4663** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4664output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4665available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4666input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4667temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4668program.
4669
4670An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4671and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4672programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4673automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4674as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4675ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4676
4677** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4678a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4679MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4680was not documented clearly before.
4681
4682** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4683This includes Tetris and Snake.
4684\f
4685* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4686
4687** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4688return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4689They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4690meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4691
4692** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4693WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4694and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4695
4696** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4697
4698*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4699It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4700
4701*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4702the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4703integers.
4704
4705** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4706files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4707arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4708file names and attributes are returned.
4709
4710** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4711sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4712accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4713It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4714returns the result.
4715
4716** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4717to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4718
4719** New functions for base64 conversion:
4720
4721The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4722into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4723performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4724optionally.
4725
4726Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4727job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4728
4729**
4730The new function process-running-child-p
4731will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4732terminal to its own child process.
4733
4734** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4735when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4736to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4737itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4738
4739** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4740be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4741
4742** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4743:included is an alias for :visible.
4744
4745easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4746easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4747to move or copy menu entries.
4748
4749** Multibyte editing changes
4750
4751*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4752an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4753make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4754work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4755char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4756 (setq char (sref str idx)
4757 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4758The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4759
4760If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4761(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4762 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4763
4764*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4765region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4766deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4767
4768 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4769
4770This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4771across the boundary.
4772
4773*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4774`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4775 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4776 contains 8-bit characters.
4777 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4778 contains invalid characters.
4779
4780*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4781text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4782preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4783text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4784way.
4785
4786*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4787If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4788end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4789prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4790
4791*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4792compose Thai characters in a string.
4793
4794** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4795argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4796for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4797menus should always use the third argument.
4798
4799** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4800read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4801arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4802input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4803
4804** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4805of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4806programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4807inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4808
4809** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4810the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4811returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4812echo area contents.
4813
4814 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4815
4816** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4817NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4818requested feature cannot be loaded.
4819
4820** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4821foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4822means to clear out that attribute.
4823
4824** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4825gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4826
4827** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4828read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4829unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4830end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4831
4832** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4833the gap of the current buffer.
4834
4835** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4836to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4837current buffer.
4838
4839** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4840facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4841These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4842it back in after any modifications have been made.
4843\f
4844* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4845
4846** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4847the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4848/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4849directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4850subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4851
4852Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4853names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4854Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4855which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4856these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4857
4858Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4859starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4860time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4861
4862This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4863Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4864to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4865subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4866`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4867results.
4868
4869** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4870GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4871that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4872fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4873\f
4874* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4875
4876** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4877including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4878it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4879perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4880
4881** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4882specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4883region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4884further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4885command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4886within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4887are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4888region.
4889
4890In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4891selective undo.
4892
4893** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4894unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4895buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4896effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4897Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4898
4899The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4900though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4901-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4902load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4903
4904** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4905no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4906enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4907something that most users not do.
4908
4909** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4910operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4911The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4912applications.
4913
4914C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4915pasting operations.
4916
4917** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4918setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4919like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4920printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4921`ps-printer-name'.
4922
4923** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4924minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4925any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4926except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4927incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4928hits a new word.
4929
4930Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4931Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4932to be confused by TeX commands.
4933
4934You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4935correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4936clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4937of various alternative replacements and actions.
4938
4939Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4940the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4941corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4942alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4943flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4944
4945Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4946flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4947
4948** Changes in input method usage.
4949
4950Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4951the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4952respectively.
4953
4954You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4955
4956If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4957of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4958
4959The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4960that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4961
4962 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4963
4964 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4965
4966 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4967 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4968
4969 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4970 given in the following case:
4971 o When you are using a complex input method.
4972 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4973
4974If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4975input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4976and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4977setting it to t is helpful.
4978
4979The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4980
4981In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4982keys:
4983 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4984 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4985 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4986These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4987environment.
4988
4989** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4990names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4991minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4992get
4993
4994 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4995
4996which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4997
4998Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4999Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5000
5001** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5002at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5003its owner and group.
5004
5005** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5006Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5007
5008** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5009contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5010
5011** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5012which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5013in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5014by the left edge of the rectangle.
5015
5016** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5017increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5018C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5019for writing keyboard macros.
5020
5021** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5022files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5023frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5024the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5025additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5026info.
5027
5028** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5029
5030** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5031query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5032contents only.
5033
5034** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5035confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5036the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5037says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5038
5039** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5040non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5041literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5042
5043** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5044now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5045Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5046inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5047
5048** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5049failure if the command produces no output.
5050
5051** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5052manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5053the mouse.
5054
5055** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5056mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5057function and variable names.
5058
5059** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5060reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5061file-coding-system-alist.
5062
5063** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5064t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5065converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5066the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5067according to the current fontset.
5068
5069** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5070
5071The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5072that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5073nonascii-insert-offset.
5074
5075For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5076enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5077nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5078characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5079
5080** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5081an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5082
5083** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5084letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5085
5086** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5087are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5088command keys.
5089
5090** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5091user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5092
5093Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5094user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5095all variables that have documentation.
5096
5097** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5098shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5099that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5100minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5101it should show; the default is 20.
5102
5103Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5104the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5105of your input.
5106
5107** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5108all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5109recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5110argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5111the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5112Newly added options are included as well.
5113
5114If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5115then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5116for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5117
5118This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5119Customize menu.
5120
5121** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5122the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5123
5124** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5125buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5126invoked.
5127
5128** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5129that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5130The default is 1.
5131
5132** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5133syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5134new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5135(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5136sensibly.
5137
5138** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5139
5140** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5141value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5142two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5143
5144** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5145reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5146for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5147every night.
5148
5149** Desktop changes
5150
5151*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5152the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5153
5154*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5155and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5156
5157** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5158read and post multi-lingual articles.
5159
5160** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5161doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5162be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5163outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5164the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5165made invisible again.
5166
5167** Mail reading and sending changes
5168
5169*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5170the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5171changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5172toggle.
5173
5174*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5175now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5176summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5177the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5178rmail-default-body-file.
5179
5180*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5181longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5182handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5183
5184*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5185it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5186is evaluated to insert the signature.
5187
5188*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5189outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5190handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5191putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5192transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5193especially interested in trying feedmail.
5194
5195feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5196feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5197provided by feedmail are:
5198
5199**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5200stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5201there is also a queue for draft messages
5202
5203**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5204be prompted for confirmation
5205
5206**** does smart filling of address headers
5207
5208**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5209the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5210can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5211
5212**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5213the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5214/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5215function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5216
5217** Dired changes
5218
5219*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5220files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5221
5222*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5223run Dired on the directory name at point.
5224
5225*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5226files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5227for a specified regexp.
5228
5229** VC Changes
5230
5231*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5232conveniently.
5233
5234*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5235faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5236Dired.
5237
5238VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5239directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5240listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5241currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5242
5243You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5244then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5245vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5246control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5247on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5248
5249All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5250is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5251`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5252the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5253`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5254
5255The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5256toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5257VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5258`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5259
5260Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5261ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5262command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5263
5264*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5265file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5266session to resolve them.
5267
5268Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5269resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5270contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5271uses as well).
5272
5273*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5274command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5275you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5276either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5277branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5278If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5279using ediff.
5280
5281** Changes in Font Lock
5282
5283*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5284are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5285use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5286unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5287compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5288
5289** Frame name display changes
5290
5291*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5292frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5293raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5294when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5295
5296*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5297frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5298menu.
5299
5300** Comint (subshell) changes
5301
5302*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5303subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5304with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5305
5306*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5307
5308C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5309that is, the line after the last line you got.
5310You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5311
5312C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5313send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5314the following line.
5315
5316C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5317which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5318previously sent input.
5319
5320C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5321it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5322as the search string.
5323
5324*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5325automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5326
5327** C mode changes
5328
5329*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5330and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5331assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5332definition.
5333
5334*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5335(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5336Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5337style is still the default however.
5338
5339*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5340
5341*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5342are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5343them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5344
5345*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5346and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5347
5348*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5349namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5350
5351*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5352makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5353
5354*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5355c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5356
5357*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5358should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5359package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5360variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5361
5362** Changes to hippie-expand.
5363
5364*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5365non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5366which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5367
5368*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5369non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5370expanding dynamically.
5371
5372*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5373non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5374
5375*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5376non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5377this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5378expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5379
5380*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5381
5382** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5383
5384*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5385bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5386automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5387bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5388against the first word in the title.
5389
5390*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5391capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5392bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5393lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5394lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5395bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5396
5397*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5398generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5399replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5400bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5401
5402** Changes in vcursor.el.
5403
5404*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5405and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5406variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5407entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5408`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5409in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5410
5411*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5412Editing group once the package is loaded.
5413
5414*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5415generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
5416vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
5417
5418*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5419vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5420
5421** Ispell changes.
5422
5423*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5424buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5425are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5426
5427*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5428A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5429and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5430defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5431include:
5432
5433 o URLs are automatically skipped
5434 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5435
5436*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5437
5438** Changes to RefTeX mode
5439
5440RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5441large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5442re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5443section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5444
5445*** New recursive parser.
5446
5447The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5448entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5449recursive parser scans the individual files.
5450
5451*** Parsing only part of a document.
5452
5453Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5454partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5455the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5456
5457 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5458
5459*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5460
5461This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5462
5463 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5464
5465*** Using multiple selection buffers
5466
5467If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5468for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5469
5470 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5471
5472*** References to external documents.
5473
5474The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5475documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5476documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5477macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5478RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5479the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5480The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5481
5482*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5483
5484The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
5485and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5486
5487Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5488the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5489
5490*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5491
5492The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5493buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5494
5495*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5496
5497The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5498contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5499`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5500have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5501enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5502at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5503more.
5504
5505*** Support for the varioref package
5506
5507The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5508
5509*** New hooks
5510
5511Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5512and citations are created. These hooks are
5513`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5514`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5515
5516*** Citations outside LaTeX
5517
5518The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5519a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5520
5521*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5522
5523The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5524fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5525fontified, use
5526
5527 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5528
5529** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5530With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5531the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5532directories that contain the same file name.
5533
5534Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5535Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5536file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5537Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5538have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5539names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5540directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5541directory.
5542
5543** New modes and packages
5544
5545*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5546It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5547it, but some do not.
5548
5549*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5550code.
5551
5552*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5553current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5554around in a buffer.
5555
5556Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5557
5558*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5559uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5560be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5561established system of notation similar to Chess.
5562
5563*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5564documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5565guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5566
5567*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5568available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5569system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5570simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5571functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5572the like.
5573
5574*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5575identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5576
5577*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5578within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5579used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5580the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5581
5582*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5583
5584 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5585 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5586 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5587 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5588 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5589 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5590 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5591 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5592 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5593 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5594 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5595
5596 Platform-specific modes:
5597
5598 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5599 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5600 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5601 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5602 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5603 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5604 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5605 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5606 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
5607\f
5608* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5609
5610** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5611use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5612That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5613Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5614
5615Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5616you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5617consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5618
5619** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5620and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5621specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5622searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5623
5624** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5625multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5626character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5627environment.
5628
5629** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5630take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
5631string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
5632current input method for reading this one event.
5633
5634** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
5635now control whether to output certain characters as
5636backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
5637non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
5638characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
5639in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
5640\f
5641* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5642
5643** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
5644of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
5645
5646** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
5647in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
5648always increases point by 1.
5649
5650The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
5651considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
5652
5653See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
5654
5655** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
5656Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
5657default value changed. For example,
5658
5659 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
5660 :type 'integer
5661 :group 'foo
5662 :version "20.3")
5663
5664 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5665 :version "20.3")
5666
5667If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5668default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5669is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5670`:version' in the top level group.
5671
5672This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5673
5674** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5675starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5676
5677However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5678symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5679support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5680to themselves.
5681
5682If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5683this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5684values whatever.
5685
5686** There is a new debugger command, R.
5687It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5688in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5689
5690** Frame-local variables.
5691
5692You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5693the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5694local bindings for that variable.
5695
5696These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5697frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5698modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5699parameter name.
5700
5701Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5702Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5703active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5704that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5705
5706It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5707clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5708very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5709through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5710
5711** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5712"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5713evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5714makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5715See the documentation in sregex.el.
5716
5717** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5718is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5719parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5720The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5721
5722** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5723If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5724
5725** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5726known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5727define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5728
5729** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5730when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5731it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5732history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5733
5734The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5735return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5736empty input.
5737
5738** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5739for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5740`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5741Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5742`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5743
5744** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5745echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5746a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5747default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5748
5749** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5750specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5751function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5752place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5753non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5754
5755** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5756If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5757up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5758end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5759
5760** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5761which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5762If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5763
5764** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5765holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5766was directed to display this buffer.
5767
5768** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5769with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5770describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5771other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5772set-window-configuration.
5773
5774** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5775window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5776positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5777windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5778
5779** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5780override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5781look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5782
5783If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5784non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5785map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5786
5787minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5788and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5789
5790** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5791except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5792
5793** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5794USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5795floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5796
5797** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5798to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5799in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5800it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5801
5802** Menu changes
5803
5804*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5805keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5806better supported.
5807
5808The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5809a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5810you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5811can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5812then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5813
5814*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5815
5816In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5817 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5818defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5819starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5820
5821The format is:
5822 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5823 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5824where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5825string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5826The supported properties include
5827
5828:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5829 item is enabled.
5830:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5831 item should appear in the menu.
5832:filter FILTER-FN
5833 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5834 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5835 It should return a binding to use instead.
5836:keys DESCRIPTION
5837 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5838 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5839 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5840:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5841 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5842 keyboard binding.
5843:key-sequence nil
5844 This means that the command normally has no
5845 keyboard equivalent.
5846:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5847:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5848 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5849 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5850 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5851
5852Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5853Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5854
5855(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5856
5857** New event types
5858
5859*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5860mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5861corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5862which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5863
5864 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5865
5866where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5867same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5868indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5869negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5870the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5871forward, away from the user.
5872
5873As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5874
5875*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5876files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5877and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5878filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5879loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5880
5881 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5882
5883where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5884same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5885that were dragged and dropped.
5886
5887As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5888
5889** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5890
5891*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5892any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5893to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5894
5895*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5896can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5897that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5898
5899*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5900in Emacs 19 and before.
5901
5902The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5903The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5904
5905*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5906buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5907unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5908representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5909
5910This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5911as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5912viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5913one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5914will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5915
5916This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5917representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5918(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5919consistent with the new representation.
5920
5921*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5922representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5923about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5924however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5925
5926The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5927nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5928using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5929
5930*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5931representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5932representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5933
5934The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5935loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5936is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5937
5938*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5939which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5940
5941*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5942which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5943
5944*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5945portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5946so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5947You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5948
5949*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5950it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5951
5952*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5953convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5954buffer or string being searched.
5955
5956One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5957[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5958searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5959searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5960obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5961you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5962expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5963
5964*** Structure of coding system changed.
5965
5966All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5967by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5968which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5969as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5970vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5971your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5972define-coding-system-alias.
5973
5974The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5975the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5976access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5977pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5978character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5979safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5980'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5981`iso-8859-1'.
5982
5983Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5984The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5985coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5986(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5987
5988Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5989also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5990are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5991the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5992
5993*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5994proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5995This function requires a user interaction.
5996
5997*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5998find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5999select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6000systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6001a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6002select-safe-coding-system.
6003
6004*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6005decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6006last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6007was done.
6008
6009*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6010used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6011coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6012
6013*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6014return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6015characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6016`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6017
6018*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6019coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6020coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6021converted.
6022
6023*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6024coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6025
6026*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6027character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6028character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6029each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6030either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6031range of characters.
6032
6033*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6034Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6035
6036*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6037in the current buffer at position POS.
6038
6039*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6040input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6041function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6042character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6043event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6044binding input-method-function to nil.
6045
6046The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6047method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6048input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6049the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6050not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6051
6052The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6053subsequent events of a key sequence.
6054
6055*** You can customize any language environment by using
6056set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6057
6058The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6059customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6060instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6061environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6062exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
6063\f
6064* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6065
6066** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6067options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6068at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6069tree structure.
6070
6071M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6072user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6073
6074With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6075session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6076in your .emacs file.)
6077
6078** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6079You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6080
6081** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6082This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6083
6084** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6085immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6086kills the region.
6087
6088The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6089delete the character before point, as usual.
6090
6091** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6092on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6093by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6094
6095** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6096insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6097the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6098onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6099history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6100past.)
6101
6102** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6103This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6104in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6105TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6106makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6107
6108As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6109and is an alias for it.
6110
6111If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6112use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6113
6114** Scrolling changes
6115
6116*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6117position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6118
6119In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6120on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6121where it started.
6122
6123*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6124move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6125screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6126does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6127
6128*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6129top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6130comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6131recenters the window.
6132
6133** International character set support (MULE)
6134
6135Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6136including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6137Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6138Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6139features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6140MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6141
6142Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6143coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6144character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6145variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6146into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6147
6148Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6149generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6150supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6151language, to make it possible to type them.
6152
6153The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6154character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6155
6156The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6157to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6158
6159You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6160
6161 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6162
6163Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6164characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6165argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6166already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6167characters for their work until they want to change.
6168
6169*** Input methods
6170
6171An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6172specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6173has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6174the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6175support several input methods.
6176
6177The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6178another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6179work.
6180
6181A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6182characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6183composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6184consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6185sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6186letter.
6187
6188The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6189by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6190First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6191marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6192mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6193
6194None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6195they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6196phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6197converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6198
6199Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6200word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6201typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6202the first guess is wrong.
6203
6204*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6205turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6206
6207If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6208byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6209they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6210the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6211
6212However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6213use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6214includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6215translate automatically to and from either one.
6216
6217*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6218
6219Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6220file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6221sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6222what you want.
6223
6224If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6225example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6226system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6227multibyte characters in that buffer.
6228
6229If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6230character conversion as well.
6231
6232*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6233
6234A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6235Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6236requires using many fonts.
6237
6238Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6239collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6240
6241A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6242the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6243have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6244you would use a font.
6245
6246If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6247specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6248display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6249
6250The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6251(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6252characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6253or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6254and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6255
6256*** Defining fontsets.
6257
6258Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6259chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6260with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6261
6262Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6263of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6264`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6265standard fontset are created automatically.
6266
6267If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6268argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6269FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6270with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6271name is `fontset-startup'.
6272
6273Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6274The resource value should have this form:
6275 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6276FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6277 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6278 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6279 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6280The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6281of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
6282CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
6283FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
6284
6285Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6286last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6287You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6288
6289For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6290font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6291following resource,
6292 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6293the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6294 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6295Here is the substitution rule:
6296 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6297 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6298 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6299 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6300 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6301
6302The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6303fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6304that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6305
6306With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6307like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6308name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6309fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6310fontsets.
6311
6312*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6313defaults for a particular choice of language.
6314
6315Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6316method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6317visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6318already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6319language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6320system for new files that you create.
6321
6322It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6323set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6324whole Emacs session.
6325
6326For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6327chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6328with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6329
6330*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6331specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6332specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6333the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6334coding systems that Emacs supports.
6335
6336*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6337lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6338This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6339After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6340is used for *the immediately following command*.
6341
6342So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6343write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6344
6345If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6346then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6347
6348For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6349visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6350
6351*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6352construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6353to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6354specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6355of the file.
6356
6357*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6358the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6359code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6360translated into that character code.
6361
6362This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6363various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6364
6365By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6366
6367*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6368the coding system for keyboard input.
6369
6370Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6371with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6372some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6373
6374By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6375
6376Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6377input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6378translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6379to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6380designed to work with terminals.
6381
6382*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6383specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6384This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6385has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6386translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6387in the corresponding buffer.
6388
6389By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6390
6391*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6392to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6393It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6394
6395*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6396an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6397command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6398want to use.
6399
6400C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6401method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6402
6403*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6404layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6405remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6406which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6407
6408*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6409the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6410related information.
6411
6412*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6413HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6414scripts.
6415
6416*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6417information about the support for a particular language.
6418You specify the language as an argument.
6419
6420*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6421the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6422first dash.
6423
6424A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6425(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6426whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
64271 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6428
6429 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6430 B big5 (Chinese)
6431 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6432 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6433 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6434 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6435 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6436 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6437 K euc-korea (Korean)
6438 R koi8 (Russian)
6439 Q tibetan
6440 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6441 T lao
6442 T tis620 (Thai)
6443 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6444 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6445 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6446 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6447 z hz (Chinese)
6448
6449When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6450two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6451coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6452keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6453
6454*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6455conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6456
6457When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6458into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6459rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6460Rmail files themselves.
6461
6462*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6463conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6464
6465Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6466for sending mail:
6467
6468- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6469- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6470- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6471 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6472- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6473
6474*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6475to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6476Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6477translations.
6478
6479** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6480of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6481insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6482without any conversion.
6483
6484** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6485You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6486RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6487any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6488
6489** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6490functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6491
6492Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6493Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6494
6495Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6496mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6497
6498** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6499complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6500in the buffer before point.
6501
6502With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6503symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6504you are using.
6505
6506With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6507just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6508
6509** File locking works with NFS now.
6510
6511The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6512in the same directory as FILENAME.
6513
6514This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6515works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6516can become a bottleneck.
6517
6518The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6519does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6520create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6521file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6522rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6523so useful that the change is worth while.
6524
6525When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6526are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6527collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6528tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6529
6530** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6531it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6532show-paren-mode.
6533
6534** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6535selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6536delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6537
6538** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6539within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6540complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6541
6542** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6543it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6544set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6545
6546** Changes in View mode.
6547
6548*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6549Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6550
6551*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6552view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6553
6554*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6555previous state.
6556
6557*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6558scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6559
6560*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6561non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6562not just the selected window.
6563
6564*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6565read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6566turns View mode on or off.
6567
6568*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6569how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6570delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6571
6572** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6573now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6574
6575** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6576has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6577presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6578which version to compare with.
6579
6580** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6581blocks if a match is inside the block.
6582
6583The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6584is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6585isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6586shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6587
6588By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6589of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6590blocks, all of them or none.
6591
6592** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6593current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6594confirmation first.
6595
6596** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6597now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6598However, the mode will not be changed if
6599(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6600(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6601 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6602(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6603
6604This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6605
6606However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6607these commands do not change the major mode.
6608
6609** M-x occur changes.
6610
6611*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6612it performs a case-sensitive search.
6613
6614*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6615if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6616using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6617
6618** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6619in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6620window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6621that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6622buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6623
6624** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6625after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6626appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6627come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6628
6629** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6630selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
6631buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
6632
6633** Outline mode changes.
6634
6635*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
6636
6637*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
6638
6639** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
6640you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
6641Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
6642was already active.
6643
6644The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
6645unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
6646get confused by it.
6647
6648If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
6649set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
6650
6651** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
6652
6653*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
6654conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
6655character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
6656including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
6657
6658The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
6659mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
6660copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
6661
6662*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6663are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6664values.
6665
6666`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6667case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6668`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6669case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6670
6671** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6672certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6673can be. The default value is 30.
6674
6675** Changes in Mail mode.
6676
6677*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6678Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6679composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6680`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6681`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6682behavior.
6683
6684C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6685compose-mail-other-frame.
6686
6687*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6688the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6689replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6690buffer that shows the original message.
6691
6692*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6693with separator lines around the contents.
6694
6695*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6696in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6697definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6698need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6699
6700*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6701
6702**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6703for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6704controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6705Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6706
6707**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6708to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6709/etc/passwd.
6710
6711**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6712to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6713/etc/passwd.
6714
6715** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6716special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6717directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6718reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6719
6720Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6721when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6722be taken to be magic.
6723
6724** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6725files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6726available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6727
6728M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6729(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6730
6731** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6732suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6733
6734In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6735
6736new key dired.el binding old key
6737------- ---------------- -------
6738 * c dired-change-marks c
6739 * m dired-mark m
6740 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6741 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6742 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6743 * u dired-unmark u
6744 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6745 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6746 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6747 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6748 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6749 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6750
6751** Rmail changes.
6752
6753*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6754saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6755chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6756each time you run it.
6757
6758*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6759whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6760
6761*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6762messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6763means to move in the opposite direction.
6764
6765*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6766you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6767
6768*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6769just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6770It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6771can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6772for output.
6773
6774** Gnus changes.
6775
6776*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6777
6778*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6779Gnus.
6780
6781*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6782`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6783
6784*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6785article mode line.
6786
6787*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6788
6789*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6790
6791(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6792
6793*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6794are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6795`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6796
6797*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6798
6799*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6800
6801*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6802See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6803
6804*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6805Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6806used to pick articles.
6807
6808*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6809another have been added.
6810
6811 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6812
6813*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6814generating lines in buffers.
6815
6816*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6817`M-C-_'.
6818
6819*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6820
6821*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6822
6823 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6824
6825*** Scores can be decayed.
6826
6827 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6828
6829*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6830Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6831
6832*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6833the native server.
6834
6835 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6836
6837*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6838(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6839
6840*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6841
6842*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6843even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6844
6845*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6846(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6847
6848 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6849 a group.
6850
6851*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6852sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6853
6854 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6855
6856*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6857
6858 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6859
6860*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6861
6862 Use the `Y c' command.
6863
6864*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6865
6866*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6867
6868 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6869
6870*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6871from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6872
6873 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6874
6875*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6876
6877*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6878the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6879
6880 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6881
6882Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6883and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6884from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6885hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6886this issue.)
6887
6888Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6889automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6890particular news group. This can be done by:
6891
6892 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6893
6894Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6895of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6896"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6897system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6898for reading and posting).
6899
6900CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6901 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6902Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6903newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6904there.
6905
6906Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6907default. Here are some of these default settings:
6908
6909 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6910 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6911 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6912 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6913 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6914
6915When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6916the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6917
6918** CC mode changes.
6919
6920*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6921code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6922values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6923this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6924Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6925loaded.
6926
6927If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6928Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6929style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6930share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6931c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6932must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6933
6934*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6935of the current buffer.
6936
6937*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6938it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6939of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6940
6941*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6942style that the Python developers like.
6943
6944*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6945This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6946just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6947
6948** VC Changes [new]
6949
6950** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6951name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6952directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6953
6954This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6955master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6956developers.
6957
6958You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6959RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6960
6961*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6962other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6963writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6964calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6965
6966*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6967version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6968
6969** Calendar changes.
6970
6971A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6972of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6973for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6974
6975** ps-print changes
6976
6977There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6978
6979*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6980
6981The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6982formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6983`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6984`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6985It defaults to `letter'.
6986If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6987
6988The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6989of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6990non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6991
6992The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6993It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6994It defaults to 1.
6995
6996*** Horizontal layout
6997
6998The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6999`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
7000All are measured in points.
7001
7002*** Vertical layout
7003
7004The vertical layout is determined by the variables
7005`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
7006All are measured in points.
7007
7008*** Headers
7009
7010If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
7011`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
7012margin above the text.
7013
7014If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
7015framing box is printed around the header.
7016
7017The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
7018`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
7019
7020The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
7021`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
7022`ps-header-font-size'.
7023
7024*** Font managing
7025
7026The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
7027used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
7028`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
7029elements to this alist.
7030
7031The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
7032for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
7033
7034** hideshow changes.
7035
7036*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7037C++, ; for lisp).
7038
7039*** Support for java-mode added.
7040
7041*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7042in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7043
7044*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
7045the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7046way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7047
7048*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7049robust and a lot faster.
7050
7051*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7052
7053*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7054to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7055documentation for more details.
7056
7057** Changes in Enriched mode.
7058
7059*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7060filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7061of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7062use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7063the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7064
7065*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7066distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7067as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7068as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7069
7070** Font Lock mode
7071
7072*** Custom support
7073
7074The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7075font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7076faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7077group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7078your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7079consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7080
7081You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7082
7083*** Maximum decoration
7084
7085Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7086default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7087of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7088supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7089to get the old behavior.
7090
7091*** New support
7092
7093Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7094
7095Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7096support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7097
7098*** Configurable support
7099
7100Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7101additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7102c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7103java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7104list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7105of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7106convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7107
7108Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7109way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7110it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7111
7112*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7113
7114You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7115highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7116for any mode.
7117
7118For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7119
7120 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7121
7122in your ~/.emacs.
7123
7124*** New faces
7125
7126Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7127font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7128distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7129to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7130
7131*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7132
7133The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7134cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7135same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7136
7137*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7138
7139The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7140according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7141the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7142non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7143refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7144the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7145Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7146
7147This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7148For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7149this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7150refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7151containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7152the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7153
7154As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7155
7156Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7157Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7158Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7159new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7160
7161If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7162settings.
7163
7164** Ada mode changes.
7165
7166*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7167If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7168procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7169you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7170stubs.
7171
7172*** There are two new commands:
7173 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7174 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7175
7176The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7177`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7178`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7179
7180*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7181is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7182Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7183
7184*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7185formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7186places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7187space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7188
7189** Scheme mode changes.
7190
7191*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7192mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7193for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7194with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7195have any effect.
7196
7197If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7198still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7199scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7200variables as buffer-local variables.
7201
7202*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7203Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7204
7205** Changes to the emacsclient program
7206
7207*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7208USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7209associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7210can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7211
7212*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7213it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7214buffer in Emacs.
7215
7216*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7217use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7218ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7219option takes precedence.
7220
7221** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7222constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7223(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7224
7225** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7226which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7227the current defun.
7228
7229** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7230following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7231
7232** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7233and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7234necessary).
7235
7236** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7237if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7238these register values no longer become completely useless.
7239If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7240asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7241it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7242
7243** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7244example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7245be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7246you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7247
7248You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7249variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7250file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7251revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7252only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7253
7254** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7255since it applies only to the current frame.
7256
7257** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7258file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7259and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7260
7261This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7262multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7263variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7264tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7265instead of just the file you are editing.
7266
7267** RefTeX mode
7268
7269RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7270and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7271different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7272multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7273turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7274
7275C-c ( reftex-label
7276 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7277 knows which kind of label is needed.
7278
7279C-c ) reftex-reference
7280 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7281 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7282
7283C-c [ reftex-citation
7284 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7285 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7286
7287C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7288 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7289
7290C-c = reftex-toc
7291 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7292 can quickly jump to every section.
7293
7294Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7295commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7296Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7297reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7298C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7299
7300** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7301
7302*** Info documentation is now available.
7303
7304*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7305both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7306
7307*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7308bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7309
7310*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7311(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7312
7313*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7314entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7315appropriate functions.
7316
7317*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7318entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7319
7320*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7321been cleaned.
7322
7323*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7324bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7325
7326*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7327shall be delimited.
7328
7329*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7330bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7331bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7332
7333*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7334field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7335prefixed with `ALT'.
7336
7337*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7338bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7339formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7340documentation).
7341
7342*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7343documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7344for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7345
7346*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7347comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7348
7349*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7350alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7351signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7352
7353*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7354
7355*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7356
7357*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7358from alien sources.
7359
7360*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7361to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7362crossref entries.
7363
7364*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
7365region.
7366
7367*** Added support for imenu.
7368
7369*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
7370of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
7371`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
7372`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
7373
7374*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
7375from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
7376
7377** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
7378
7379** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
7380
7381** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
7382functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
7383Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
7384as an argument.
7385
7386When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
7387and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
7388
7389** browse-url changes
7390
7391*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
7392Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
7393(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
7394non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
7395customization variables.
7396
7397*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
7398
7399*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
7400lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
7401(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
7402
7403** Changes in Ediff
7404
7405*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
7406pops up the Info file for this command.
7407
7408*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
7409the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
7410merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
7411directories).
7412
7413*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
7414and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
7415files in the same directory.
7416
7417*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
7418The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
7419related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
7420
7421** Changes in Viper
7422
7423*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
7424*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
7425 instead of vip-.
7426*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
7427*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
7428Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
7429*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
7430*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
7431*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
7432color when Viper is in insert state.
7433*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
7434Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
7435viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
7436
7437** Etags changes.
7438
7439*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
7440default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
7441Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
7442variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
7443not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
7444
7445*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
7446
7447*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
7448constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
7449
7450*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
7451recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
7452In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
7453
7454*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
7455C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
7456recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
7457methods and protocols.
7458
7459*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
7460.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
7461column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
7462paragraph name.
7463
7464*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
7465an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
7466at least M times and as many as N times.
7467
7468** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
7469in files has changed slightly.
7470
7471With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
7472time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
7473This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
7474with old time-stamp-format values.
7475
7476In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
7477(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
7478This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
7479reasons.
7480
7481In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
7482natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
7483fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
7484(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
7485time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
7486specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
7487
7488Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
7489case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
7490truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
7491
7492The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
7493being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
7494future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
7495recommended now will continue to work then.
7496
7497See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
7498details.
7499
7500** There are some additional major modes:
7501
7502dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
7503m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
7504meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
7505
7506** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
7507copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
7508into Emacs.
7509
7510** New Lisp packages include:
7511
7512*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
7513
7514*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
7515be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
7516
7517*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
7518
7519*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
7520in shell buffers.
7521
7522*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
7523See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
7524and `elint-defun'.
7525
7526*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
7527meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
7528ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
7529strings or comments.
7530
7531These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
7532abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
7533you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
7534insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
7535at these points.
7536
7537*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
7538can visit them by short forms of their names.
7539
7540*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
7541Emacs Lisp function at point.
7542
7543*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
7544
7545*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
7546switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
7547
7548*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
7549
7550*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
7551
7552*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
7553
7554*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
7555from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
7556
7557*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
7558You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
7559inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
7560original place after inserting the copy.
7561
7562*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
7563on the buffer.
7564
7565You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
7566velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
7567(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
7568
7569Enable mouse-drag with:
7570 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
7571-or-
7572 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
7573
7574*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
7575mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
7576
7577*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
7578It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
7579
7580*** ogonek
7581
7582The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
7583Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
7584platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
7585TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
7586ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
7587prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
7588instance) and vice versa.
7589
7590To use this package load it using
7591 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
7592Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
7593 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
7594 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
7595The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
7596ways of customization in `.emacs'.
7597
7598*** Interface to ph.
7599
7600Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
7601
7602The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
7603services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
7604these servers.
7605
7606*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
7607
7608*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
7609You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
7610while the real cursor does not move.
7611
7612*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
7613for visiting your favorite web sites.
7614
7615*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
7616so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
7617
7618** movemail change
7619
7620Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
7621mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
7622supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
7623user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
7624
7625This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
7626\f
7627* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
7628
7629** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
7630
7631Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
7632end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
7633Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
7634file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
7635file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
7636
7637To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
7638C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
7639coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
7640specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
7641LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
7642save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
7643\f
7644* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
7645
7646** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
7647Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
7648vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
7649Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
7650
7651** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
7652to start with w32- instead of win32-.
7653
7654In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
7655don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
7656"win".
7657
7658** Basic Lisp changes
7659
7660*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
7661evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7662
7663*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7664be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7665or by the user.
7666
7667The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7668
7669*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7670
7671(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7672(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7673
7674*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7675usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7676its argument.
7677
7678*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7679
7680*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7681
7682*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7683
7684*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7685error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7686include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7687`format' function.
7688
7689*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7690or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7691whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7692
7693*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7694either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7695adding one of these suffixes.
7696
7697*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7698which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7699If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7700
7701We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7702because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7703
7704*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7705
7706*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7707You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7708
7709*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7710conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7711
7712 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7713
7714BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7715BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7716
7717*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7718choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7719restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7720works using `save-current-buffer'.
7721
7722*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7723write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7724of the last form.
7725
7726*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7727which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7728last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7729as the last form.
7730
7731*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7732characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7733matches.
7734
7735For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7736
7737*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7738with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7739Then it returns that string.
7740
7741For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7742
7743(with-output-to-string
7744 (princ "The buffer is ")
7745 (princ (buffer-name)))
7746
7747returns "The buffer is foo".
7748
7749** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7750is non-nil.
7751
7752These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7753buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7754characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7755
7756*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7757a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7758
7759Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7760character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7761Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7762position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7763characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7764 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7765
7766ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7767Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7768non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7769characters".
7770
7771The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7772through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7773"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7774range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7775leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7776
7777*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7778(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7779multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7780character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7781
7782This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7783always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7784
7785However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7786
7787*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7788because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7789have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7790the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7791guaranteed.
7792
7793*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7794between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7795character).
7796
7797When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7798
7799 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7800 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7801 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7802 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7803 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7804
7805*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7806
7807*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7808`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7809more than the number of characters.
7810
7811You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7812it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7813\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7814is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7815follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7816newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7817
7818*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7819and returns a string containing those characters.
7820
7821*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7822(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7823counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7824character, sref signals an error.
7825
7826*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7827in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7828string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7829
7830*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7831in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7832region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7833
7834*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7835the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7836to a vector of the characters in it.
7837
7838*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7839of a string. You call it as follows:
7840
7841 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7842
7843This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7844STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7845This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7846Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7847it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7848
7849*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7850if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7851
7852*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7853if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7854
7855*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7856to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7857not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7858which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7859
7860(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7861
7862This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7863
7864The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7865If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7866are not included in the resulting value.
7867
7868The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7869at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7870WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7871is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7872
7873If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7874place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7875character extends across that column), then the padding character
7876PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7877string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7878column START-COLUMN.
7879
7880*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7881the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7882necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7883difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7884changed text, before the change.
7885
7886*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7887sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7888one character set for each script, not for each language.
7889
7890**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7891
7892**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7893
7894**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7895set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7896
7897**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7898name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7899which identify the character within that character set.
7900
7901**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7902byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7903opposite of split-char.
7904
7905**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7906of all the characters between BEG and END.
7907
7908**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7909of all the characters in a string.
7910
7911*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7912and specifying coding systems.
7913
7914**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7915system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7916of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7917(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7918and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7919as what to do about code conversion.)
7920
7921**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7922name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7923
7924**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7925for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7926except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7927
7928Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7929which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7930to match against a file name.
7931
7932VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7933a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7934decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7935to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7936systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7937specifies the coding system for encoding.
7938
7939If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7940or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7941
7942**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7943the coding system to use for network sockets.
7944
7945Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7946which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7947either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7948service names.
7949
7950VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7951a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7952decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7953to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7954systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7955specifies the coding system for encoding.
7956
7957If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7958or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7959
7960**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7961for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7962except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7963start the subprocess.
7964
7965**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7966systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7967when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7968(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7969to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7970
7971**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7972coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7973subprocess.
7974
7975It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7976but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7977start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7978connection permanently or until overridden.
7979
7980The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7981file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7982network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7983coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7984It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7985system for one operation at a time.
7986
7987**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7988files, subprocesses or network connections.
7989
7990**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7991coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7992The value is a cons cell,
7993 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7994where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7995the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7996input to the subprocess.
7997
7998**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7999change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8000
8001** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8002customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8003you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8004
8005You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8006variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8007information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8008legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8009customization.
8010
8011Thus, instead of writing
8012
8013 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8014 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8015
8016you would now write this:
8017
8018 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8019 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8020 :type 'boolean
8021 :group foo)
8022
8023The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8024two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8025describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8026for a description of them.
8027
8028The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8029should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8030
8031 (defgroup ispell nil
8032 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8033 :group 'processes)
8034
8035The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8036group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8037but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8038to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8039second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8040
8041Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8042package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8043have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8044package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8045first-level subgroups.
8046
8047** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8048
8049This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8050separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8051
8052** easy-mmode
8053
8054The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8055developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8056only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8057predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8058`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8059`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8060
8061** Text property changes
8062
8063*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8064text property.
8065
8066*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8067previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8068place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8069functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8070starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8071
8072If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8073LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8074of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8075position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8076
8077*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8078value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8079is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8080
8081** Changes in invisibility features
8082
8083*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8084hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8085is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8086should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8087would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8088make the overlay visible.
8089
8090During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8091invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8092needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8093which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8094the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8095t when it should hide it.
8096
8097*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8098
8099Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8100invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8101and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8102Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8103manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8104Here is an example of how to do this:
8105
8106 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8107 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8108 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8109 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8110
8111 ...
8112 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8113
8114 ...
8115 ;; When done with the overlays:
8116 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8117 ;; Or respectively:
8118 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8119
8120** Changes in syntax parsing.
8121
8122*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8123`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8124obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8125`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8126
8127If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8128is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8129used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8130
8131When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8132character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8133
8134 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8135 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8136
8137 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8138 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8139 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8140
8141 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8142 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8143 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8144 determine the syntax type of the character.
8145
8146 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8147 of the current buffer.
8148
8149*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8150value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8151for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8152
8153*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8154and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8155only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8156character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8157another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8158
8159These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8160text property.
8161
8162*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8163arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8164of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8165
8166*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8167(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8168element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8169nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8170string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8171
8172*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8173syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8174`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8175
8176** Changes in face features
8177
8178*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8179if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8180
8181*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8182of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8183
8184*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8185set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8186
8187*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8188set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8189
8190*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8191by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8192and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8193the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8194overlay property).
8195
8196This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8197arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8198
8199** Changes in file-handling functions
8200
8201*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8202directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8203they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8204is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8205
8206This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8207begins with ~.
8208
8209*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8210it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8211
8212*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8213the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8214
8215*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8216as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8217
8218*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8219character code conversion as well as other things.
8220
8221Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8222(formerly it did not).
8223
8224*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8225environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8226
8227*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8228instead of constant strings.
8229
8230*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8231to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8232any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8233
8234substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8235in the same way as before.
8236
8237*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8238The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8239which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8240
8241*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8242error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8243else, and returns nil.
8244
8245*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8246directory cannot be listed.
8247
8248** Changes in minibuffer input
8249
8250*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8251read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8252additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8253argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8254ways:
8255
8256 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8257 It is available through the history command M-n.
8258
8259*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8260read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8261argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8262minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8263enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8264
8265In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8266argument in this way.
8267
8268*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8269from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8270minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8271
8272** Echo area features
8273
8274*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8275echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8276minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8277after the echo area is cleared.
8278
8279*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8280in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8281
8282** Keyboard input features
8283
8284*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8285set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8286
8287*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8288received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8289by keyboard macros.
8290
8291** Frame-related changes
8292
8293*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8294creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8295hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8296
8297*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8298the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8299has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8300
8301*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8302selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8303value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8304in the selected frame.
8305
8306*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8307is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8308which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8309
8310** X Windows features
8311
8312*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8313x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8314x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8315
8316*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8317The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8318
8319*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8320MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8321A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8322
8323If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8324it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8325
8326** Subprocess features
8327
8328*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8329functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8330automatically.
8331
8332*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8333and returns the output from the command as a string.
8334
8335*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8336and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8337
8338** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8339does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8340
8341** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8342at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8343goes after the other menu items.
8344
8345** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8346of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8347around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8348are in use.
8349
8350The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8351series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8352
8353Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8354after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8355form.
8356
8357** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8358is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8359but its hook is still run.
8360
8361** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8362for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8363
8364If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
8365regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
8366useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
8367
8368This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
8369are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
8370filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
8371warned.
8372
8373** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
8374way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
8375
8376** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
8377integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
8378functions like display-time.
8379
8380** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
8381name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
8382
8383** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
8384can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
8385is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
8386
8387** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
8388if there is an error in compilation.
8389
8390** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
8391switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
8392argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
8393they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
8394
8395** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
8396Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
8397the *scratch* buffer.
8398
8399** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
8400The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
8401where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
8402e.g., in Font Lock mode.
8403
8404** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
8405and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
8406It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
8407
8408** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
8409using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
8410variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
8411and compose-mail-other-frame.
8412
8413** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
8414can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
8415full name of the specified user will be returned.
8416
8417** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
8418of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
8419where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
8420in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
8421option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
8422files at all.
8423
8424** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
8425and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
8426width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
8427the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
8428
8429For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
8430minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
8431with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
8432is how %S normally pads to two positions.
8433
8434** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
8435
8436** imenu.el changes.
8437
8438You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
8439item from menu created by imenu.
8440
8441An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
8442#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
8443select one of those items.
8444\f
8445* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
8446\f
8447* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
8448
8449** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
8450mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
8451
8452** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
8453use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
8454Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
8455\f
8456* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
8457
8458** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
8459To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
8460
8461** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
8462conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
8463matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
8464expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
8465word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
8466all caps.
8467
8468** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
8469at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
8470
8471When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
8472does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
8473as in previous Emacs versions.
8474
8475** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
8476non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
8477time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
8478frames.
8479
8480** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
8481if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
8482This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
8483Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
8484accident.
8485
8486** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
8487keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
8488It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
8489line and then executing the macro.
8490
8491This command is not new, but was never documented before.
8492
8493** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
8494(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
8495characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
8496characters.
8497
8498** Font Lock mode
8499
8500*** Font Lock support modes
8501
8502Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
8503below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
8504hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
8505to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
8506Font Lock mode is enabled.
8507
8508For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
8509
8510 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
8511
8512in your ~/.emacs.
8513
8514*** lazy-lock
8515
8516The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
8517only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
8518becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
8519Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
8520occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
8521buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
8522Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
8523
8524To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
8525
8526 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
8527
8528To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
8529
8530** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8531
8532*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
8533paren and key.
8534
8535*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
8536supported.
8537
8538** Gnus changes.
8539
8540Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
8541commands and variables have been added. There should be no
8542significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
8543previously released version, except in the message composition area.
8544
8545Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
8546between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
8547
8548*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
8549variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
8550obsolete.
8551
8552*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
8553missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
8554
8555 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
8556
8557*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
8558
8559 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
8560
8561*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
8562referred.
8563
8564*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
8565
8566 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
8567
8568*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
8569
8570 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
8571
8572*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
8573buffers.
8574
8575 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
8576
8577*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
8578
8579 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
8580
8581*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
8582
8583 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
8584
8585*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
8586
8587 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
8588
8589*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
8590is possible.
8591
8592 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
8593
8594*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
8595groups of groups.
8596
8597*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
8598
8599*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
8600batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
8601
8602*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
8603
8604*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
8605
8606*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
8607
8608 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
8609
8610*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
8611expiration times.
8612
8613*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
8614
8615*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
8616process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
8617
8618*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
8619articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
8620bound to keys on the `/' submap.
8621
8622*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
8623articles with the `*' command.
8624
8625*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
8626
8627*** Article headers can be buttonized.
8628
8629 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
8630
8631*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
8632
8633*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
8634`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
8635
8636*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
8637buffer.
8638
8639*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
8640
8641*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
8642
8643*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
8644
8645 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
8646
8647*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
8648
8649 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
8650
8651*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
8652
8653*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
8654
8655*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
8656
8657 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
8658 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
8659
8660*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
8661refetching.
8662
8663 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8664
8665*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8666buffer to allow easier treatment.
8667
8668*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8669
8670*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8671
8672 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8673
8674*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8675articles.
8676
8677 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8678
8679*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8680
8681*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8682cited text to hide is now customizable.
8683
8684 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8685
8686*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8687
8688 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8689
8690*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8691
8692*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8693
8694The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8695in greater detail.
8696\f
8697* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8698
8699** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8700second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8701asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8702exists.
8703
8704** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8705as well as lists.
8706
8707** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8708of a given keymap.
8709
8710** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8711given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8712keymap or nil.
8713
8714** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8715an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8716name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8717menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8718equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8719alias.
8720\f
8721* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8722
8723** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8724
8725Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8726This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8727was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8728far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8729pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8730
8731For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8732you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8733`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8734
8735** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8736
8737The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8738do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8739It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8740much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8741chapter of the manual for details.
8742
8743However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8744customization variables take effect.
8745
8746** Marking with the mouse.
8747
8748When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8749highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8750using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8751
8752** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8753
8754*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8755
8756*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8757to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8758
8759*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8760in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8761you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8762application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8763applications, these problems are significant.
8764
8765If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8766likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8767However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8768will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8769other DOS application as a subprocess.
8770
8771Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8772You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8773
8774If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8775subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8776have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8777Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8778separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8779Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8780
8781** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8782
8783This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8784which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8785minibuffer contains.
8786
8787** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8788
8789The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8790It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8791It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8792affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8793
8794The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8795it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8796and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8797when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8798
8799** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8800enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8801
8802** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8803F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8804Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8805
8806If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8807menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8808something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8809the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8810
8811 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8812
8813** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8814to replace the characters it "deletes".
8815
8816** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8817
8818** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8819a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8820select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8821It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8822immediately after the selected one.
8823
8824This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8825made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8826
8827** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8828
8829Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8830directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8831If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8832Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8833recover-session.
8834
8835You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8836auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8837will not work.
8838
8839Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8840normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8841this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8842bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8843now that the bug is fixed.
8844
8845** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8846
8847There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8848when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8849Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8850which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8851
8852If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8853telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8854VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8855the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8856
8857** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8858Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8859is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8860
8861There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8862Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8863enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8864The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8865remain normal.
8866
8867** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8868header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8869
8870Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8871known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8872offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8873Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8874
8875Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8876of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8877a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8878name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8879documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8880`mail-directory-stream'.)
8881
8882** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8883skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8884characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8885with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8886
8887Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8888- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8889wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8890
8891The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8892less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8893headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8894Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8895Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8896fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8897to a limitation in font-lock).
8898
8899External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8900
8901** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8902buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8903buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8904this example:
8905
8906 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8907 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8908
8909** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8910
8911*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8912
8913*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8914
8915*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8916
8917*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8918entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8919will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8920isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8921(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8922The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8923
8924*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8925does the same job.
8926
8927*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8928"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8929
8930*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8931text.
8932
8933** Font Lock mode
8934
8935*** Global Font Lock mode
8936
8937Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8938new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8939font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8940turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8941on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8942
8943For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8944
8945 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8946
8947in your ~/.emacs.
8948
8949*** Local Refontification
8950
8951In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8952However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8953those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8954command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8955
8956In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8957(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8958current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8959above and below point.
8960
8961With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8962
8963** Follow mode
8964
8965Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8966buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8967side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8968they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8969split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8970follow-mode.
8971
8972M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8973
8974To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8975command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8976
8977** hide-show changes.
8978
8979The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8980to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8981normal hooks.
8982
8983** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8984The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8985
8986** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8987recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8988those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8989
8990** MSDOS Changes
8991
8992*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8993Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8994
8995*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8996and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8997
8998*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8999
9000*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
9001pressing both mouse buttons.
9002
9003*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
9004restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
9005are:
9006
9007**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
9008now works.
9009
9010**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
9011
9012**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
9013implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
9014
9015**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
9016
9017**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
9018
9019**** `M-x recover-session' works.
9020
9021**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
9022
9023**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
9024\f
9025* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
9026
9027** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
9028tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
9029remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
9030this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
9031behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
9032
9033** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
9034
9035The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
9036not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
9037need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
9038be different.
9039
9040It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
9041than `system-type'.
9042
9043See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
9044
9045** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
9046now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
9047
9048** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
9049that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
9050
9051** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
9052no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
9053reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
9054
9055The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
9056to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
9057like this:
9058
9059 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9060
9061SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
9062It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
9063becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
9064
9065REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
9066seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
9067means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
9068
9069*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
9070up if too much time passes.
9071
9072 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
9073
9074This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
9075If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
9076of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
9077form in BODY.
9078
9079*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
9080a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
9081call looks like this:
9082
9083 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
9084
9085SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
9086runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
9087timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
9088ARGS.
9089
9090Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
9091command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
9092command.
9093
9094REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
9095time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
9096does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
9097each time Emacs becomes idle.
9098
9099If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
9100idle for SECS seconds.
9101
9102*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
9103all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
9104programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
9105instead.
9106
9107*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
9108there is no answer within a certain time.
9109
9110 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
9111
9112asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
9113within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
9114Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
9115
9116** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
9117arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
9118meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
9119arguments in between are ignored.
9120
9121This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
9122the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
9123
9124** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
9125/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
9126/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
9127site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
9128version.
9129
9130It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
9131version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
9132for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
9133has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
9134and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
9135problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
9136
9137** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
9138.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
9139systems with limited file name syntax.
9140
9141Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
9142convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
9143for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
9144completions.el:
9145
9146(defvar save-completions-file-name
9147 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
9148 "*The filename to save completions to.")
9149
9150This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
9151depends on the operating system, because the definition of
9152convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
9153Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
9154MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
9155
9156** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
9157rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
9158minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
9159
9160** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
9161marker from its buffer position.
9162
9163** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
9164Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
9165The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
9166
9167** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
9168that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
9169condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
9170of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
9171matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
9172regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
9173
9174This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
9175errors that happen often during editing.
9176
9177** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
9178into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
9179puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
9180
9181** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
9182now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
9183
9184** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
9185a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
9186name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
9187to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
9188and not get-buffer-window.
9189
9190** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
9191calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
9192being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
9193
9194If you use this feature, you should set the variable
9195buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
9196property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
9197non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
9198are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
9199property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
9200over and over for the same text.
9201
9202** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
9203
9204*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
9205in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
9206
9207;; @(#) HEADER: text
9208;; $HEADER: text $
9209
9210in addition to the normal
9211
9212;; HEADER: text
9213
9214*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
9215checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
9216lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
9217
9218
a933dad1 9219\f
3787e12e 9220* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9221
9222----------------------------------------------------------------------
9223Copyright information:
9224
424d8b44 9225Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9226
9227 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9228 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9229 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9230 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9231
9232 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9233 of this document, or of portions of it,
9234 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9235 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
9236\f
9237Local variables:
9238mode: outline
9239paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9240end: